Subaru Automobile 22L MT User Manual

/including  
1 9 9 9  
O W N E R ’ S  
M A N U A L  
Wear Seat Belts at All Times for Your Own Safety.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Foreword  
Congratulations on choosing a SUBARU vehicle. This Owner’s  
Manual has all the information necessary to keep your SUBARU in  
excellent condition and to properly maintain the emission control  
system for minimizing emission pollutants. We urge you to read this  
manual carefully so that you may understand your vehicle and its  
operation. For information not found in this Owner’s Manual, such  
as details concerning repairs or adjustments, please contact the  
dealer from whom you purchased your SUBARU or the nearest  
SUBARU dealer.  
The information, specifications and illustrations found in this manu-  
al are those in effect at the time of printing. FUJI HEAVY INDUS-  
TRIES LTD. reserves the right to change specifications and designs  
at any time without prior notice and without incurring any obligation  
to make the same or similar changes on vehicles previously sold.  
This Owner’s Manual applies to all models and covers all equip-  
ment, including factory installed options. Some explanations, there-  
fore may be for equipment not installed in your vehicle.  
Please leave this manual in the vehicle at the time of resale. The  
next owner will need the information found herein.  
FUJI HEAVY INDUSTRIES LTD., TOKYO, JAPAN  
and  
are registered trademarks of FUJI HEAVY INDUSTRIES, LTD.  
copyright 1999 FUJI HEAVY INDUSTRIES LTD.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
How to use this owner’s manual  
J Using your Owner’s manual  
Before you operate your vehicle, carefully read this manual. To protect  
yourself and extend the service life of your vehicle, follow the instructions  
in this manual. Failure to observe these instructions may result in serious  
injury and damage to your vehicle.  
This manual is composed of thirteen chapters. Each chapter begins with  
a brief table of contents, so you can usually tell at a glance if that chap-  
ter contains the information you want.  
Chapter 1: Doors and Locks  
This chapter informs you how to operate the keys, locks and windows.  
Chapter 2: Seat, seat belt and SRS airbag  
This chapter informs you how to use the seat and seat belt and contains  
precautions for the SRS airbag.  
Chapter 3: Instruments and controls  
This chapter informs you about the operation of instrument panel indica-  
tors and how to use the instruments and other switches.  
Chapter 4: Climate Control  
This chapter informs you how to operate the climate control.  
Chapter 5: Audio  
This chapter informs you how to operate your audio system.  
Chapter 6: Interior equipment  
This chapter informs you how to operate interior equipment.  
Chapter 7: Starting and operating  
This chapter informs you how to start and operate your SUBARU.  
Chapter 8: In case of emergency  
This chapter informs you what to do if you have a problem while driving,  
such as a flat tire or engine overheating.  
Chapter 9: Appearance care  
This chapter informs you how to keep your SUBARU looking good.  
Chapter 10: Maintenance and service  
This chapter informs you how to keep your SUBARU running properly.  
ii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 11: Specifications  
This chapter informs you about dimension and capacities of your  
SUBARU.  
Chapter 12: Consumer information and Reporting safety defects  
This chapter informs you about Uniform tire quality grading standards  
and Reporting safety defects.  
Chapter 13: Index  
This is an alphabetical listing of all that’s in this manual. You can use it to  
quickly find something you want to read.  
J Safety warnings  
You will find a number of WARNINGs, CAUTIONs and NOTEs in this  
manual.  
These safety warnings alert you to potential hazards that could result in  
injury to you or others.  
Please read these safety warnings as well as all other portions of this  
manual carefully in order to gain a better understanding of how to use  
your SUBARU vehicle safely.  
WARNING  
A WARNING indicates a situation in which serious injury or death  
could result if the warning is ignored.  
CAUTION  
A CAUTION indicates a situation in which injury or damage to  
your vehicle, or both, could result if the caution is ignored.  
NOTE  
A NOTE gives information or suggestions how to make better use of  
your vehicle.  
iii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
J Safety symbol  
HS0008  
You will find a circle with a slash through it in this manual. This symbol  
means “Do not”, “Do not do this”, or “Do not let this happen”, depending  
upon the context.  
Safety precautions when driving  
SEAT BELT AND SRS AIRBAG  
WARNING  
D All persons in the vehicle should fasten their seat belts BE-  
FORE the vehicle starts to move. Otherwise, the possibility of se-  
rious injury becomes greater in the event of a sudden stop or ac-  
cident.  
D To obtain maximum protection in the event of an accident, the  
driver and all passengers in the vehicle should always wear seat  
belts when the vehicle is moving. The SRS (Supplemental  
Restraint System) airbag does not do away with the need to fas-  
ten seat belts. In combination with the seat belts, it offers the  
best combined protection in case of a serious accident.  
Not wearing a seat belt increases the chance of severe injury or  
death in a crash even when the car has the SRS airbag.  
D The SRS airbags deploy with considerable speed and force.  
Occupants who are out of proper position when the SRS airbag  
iv  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
deploys could suffer very serious injuries. Because the SRS air-  
bag needs enough space for deployment, the driver should al-  
ways sit upright and well back in the seat as far from the steering  
wheel as practical while still maintaining full vehicle control and  
the front passenger should move the seat as far back as possible  
and sit upright and well back in the seat.  
Carefully read the sections “Seat Belts and SRS airbag” in chapter 2 of  
this owner’s manual for instructions and precautions concerning the seat  
belt system and SRS airbag system.  
CHILD SAFETY  
WARNING  
D Never hold a child on your lap or in your arms while the ve-  
hicle is moving. The passenger cannot protect the child from in-  
jury in a collision, because the child will be caught between the  
passenger and objects inside the vehicle.  
D While riding in the vehicle, infants and small children should  
always be placed in the REAR seat in an infant or child restraint  
system which is appropriate for the child’s age, height and  
weight. If a child is too big for a child restraint system, the child  
should sit in the REAR seat and be restrained using the seat  
belts. According to accident statistics, children are safer when  
properly restrained in the rear seating positions than in the front  
seating positions. Never allow a child to stand up or kneel on the  
seat.  
D Put children aged 12 and under in the REAR seat properly re-  
strained at all times in a child restraint device or in a seat belt.  
The SRS airbag deploys with considerable speed and force and  
can injure or even kill children, especially if they are 12 years of  
age and under and are not restrained or improperly restrained.  
Because children are lighter and weaker than adults, their risk be-  
ing injured from deployment is greater.  
D NEVER INSTALL A REARWARD FACING CHILD SEAT IN THE  
FRONT SEAT. DOING SO RISKS SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO  
– CONTINUED –  
v
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
THE CHILD BY PLACING THE CHILD’S HEAD TOO CLOSE TO  
THE SRS AIRBAG.  
D Always use the child safety locks whenever a child rides in the  
rear seat. Serious injury could result if a child accidentally  
opened the door and fell out. Refer to the “Door locks” section in  
chapter 1.  
D Always lock the passenger’s windows using the lock switch  
when children are riding in the vehicle. Failure to follow this pro-  
cedure could result in injury to a child operating the power win-  
dow. Refer to the “Power windows” section in chapter 1.  
D Never leave unattended children in the vehicle. They could ac-  
cidentally injure themselves or others through inadvertent opera-  
tion of the vehicle. Also, on hot or sunny days, temperature in a  
closed vehicle could quickly become high enough to cause se-  
vere or possibly fatal injuries to them.  
Carefully read the sections “Child restraint systems”, “SRS airbag” and  
“Seat belts” in chapter 2 of this owner’s manual for instructions and pre-  
cautions concerning the child restraint system, seat belt system and SRS  
airbag system.  
ENGINE EXHAUST GAS (CARBON MONOXIDE)  
WARNING  
D Never inhale engine exhaust gas. Engine exhaust gas contains  
carbon monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas which is danger-  
ous, or even lethal, if inhaled.  
D Always properly maintain the engine exhaust system to pre-  
vent engine exhaust gas from entering the vehicle.  
D Never run the engine in a closed space, such as a garage, ex-  
cept for the brief time needed to drive the vehicle in or out of it.  
D Avoid remaining in a parked vehicle for a lengthy time while  
the engine is running. If that is unavoidable, then use the ventila-  
tion fan to force fresh air into the vehicle.  
D Always keep the front ventilator inlet grille free from snow,  
leaves or other obstructions to ensure that the ventilation system  
always works properly.  
vi  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
D If at any time you suspect that exhaust fumes are entering the  
vehicle, have the problem checked and corrected as soon as pos-  
sible. If you must drive under these conditions, drive only with all  
windows fully open.  
D Keep the trunk lid or rear gate closed while driving to prevent  
exhaust gas from entering the vehicle.  
DRINKING AND DRIVING  
WARNING  
Drinking and then driving is very dangerous. Alcohol in the  
bloodstream delays your reaction and impairs your perception,  
judgment and attentiveness. If you drive after drinking – even if  
you drink just a little – it will increase the risk of being involved in  
a serious or fatal accident, injuring or killing yourself, your pas-  
sengers and others. In addition, if you are injured in the accident,  
alcohol may increase the severity of that injury.  
Please don’t drink and drive.  
Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of accidents. Since  
alcohol affects all people differently, you may have consumed too much  
alcohol to drive safely even if the level of alcohol in your blood is below  
the legal limit. The safest thing you can do is never drink and drive. How-  
ever if you have no choice but to drive, stop drinking and sober up com-  
pletely before getting behind the wheel.  
DRUGS AND DRIVING  
WARNING  
There are some drugs (over the counter and prescription) that  
can delay your reaction time and impair your perception, judg-  
ment and attentiveness. If you drive after taking them, it may in-  
crease your, your passengers’ and other persons’ risk of being  
involved in a serious or fatal accident.  
– CONTINUED –  
vii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
If you are taking any drugs, check with your doctor or pharmacist or read  
the literature that accompanies the medication to determine if the drug  
you are taking can impair your driving ability. Do not drive after taking  
any medications that can make you drowsy or otherwise affect your abil-  
ity to safely operate a motor vehicle. If you have a medical condition that  
requires you to take drugs, please consult with your doctor.  
Never drive if you are under the influence of any illicit mind-altering  
drugs. For your own health and well-being, we urge you not to take ille-  
gal drugs in the first place and to seek treatment if you are addicted to  
those drugs.  
DRIVING WHEN TIRED OR SLEEPY  
WARNING  
When you are tired or sleepy, your reaction will be delayed and  
your perception, judgment and attentiveness will be impaired. If  
you drive when tired or sleepy, your, your passengers’ and other  
persons’ chances of being involved in a serious accident may in-  
crease.  
Please do not continue to drive but instead find a safe place to rest if you  
are tired or sleepy. On long trips, you should make periodic rest stops to  
refresh yourself before continuing on your journey. When possible, you  
should share the driving with others.  
CAR PHONES AND DRIVING  
CAUTION  
A driver’s use of a car phone can be distracting and if special  
care is not taken, can lead to an accident. If you use a car phone  
while driving, make an extra effort to pay attention to the road  
and to traffic at all times. If you can safely do so, it is best to pull  
off to the side of the road before using your car phone.  
viii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MODIFICATION OF YOUR VEHICLE  
CAUTION  
Your vehicle should not be modified. Modification could affect its  
performance, safety or durability, and may even violate govern-  
mental regulations. In addition, damage or performance problems  
resulting from modification may not be covered under warranties.  
DRIVING WITH PETS  
Unrestrained pets can interfere with your driving and distract your atten-  
tion from driving. In a collision or sudden stop, unrestrained pets or  
cages can be thrown around inside the vehicle and hurt you or your pas-  
sengers. Besides, the pets can be hurt under these situations. It is also  
for their own safety that pets should be properly restrained in your  
vehicle. Restrain a pet with a special traveling harness which can be se-  
cured to the rear seat with a seat belt or use a pet carrier which can be  
secured to the rear seat by routing a seat belt through the carrier’s han-  
dle. Never restrain pets or pet carriers in the front passenger’s seat. For  
further information, consult your veterinarian, local animal protection so-  
ciety or pet shop.  
ix  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table of contents  
Doors and locks  
1
2
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbag  
Instruments and controls  
Climate control  
3
4
Audio  
5
Interior equipment  
6
Starting and operating  
In case of emergency  
Appearance care  
7
8
9
Maintenance and service  
Specifications  
10  
11  
12  
13  
Consumer information and Reporting safety defects  
Index  
xi  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A
ABS (Anti-Lock Brake system) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-30  
ABS warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11  
ACC (Ignition switch) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12  
Accessories installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12/10-50  
Accessory power socket  
In the instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
In the luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
6-7  
6-7  
Air cleaner element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-17  
Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5/10-6  
Replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-18  
Air conditioner operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
4-8  
Air conditioner and heater operation (see “Climate control”)  
Air filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11  
AIRBAG (See “SRS AIRBAG”)  
AIRBAG warning light (See “SRS AIRBAG”)  
All wheel drive vehicles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-33  
Aluminum wheels  
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
9-5  
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-46  
Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
5-2  
Anti lock brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-30  
Anti lock brake system warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11  
Ashtray  
Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10  
Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11  
Audio systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Chapter 5  
Automatic transmission (AT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18  
AT fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-22  
AT fluid capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3  
AT OIL temperature warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12  
Fluid leak . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7  
Selector lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-19  
Shift lock release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-21  
Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14  
13-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
B
Back seat getting into . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
2-5  
Back-up light (Bulb replacement) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-57  
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-32  
Charge warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
3-9  
8-4  
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3  
Brakes  
ABS (Anti-lock brake system) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-30  
ABS warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11  
Brake booster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31  
Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29  
Brake fluid level warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
3-9  
Brake light (Bulb replacement) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-57  
Brake master cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5/10-6  
Brake pad and lining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-39  
Brake pedal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-37  
Brake system warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
3-9  
Braking tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-28  
Checking the brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29  
Disk brake pad wear warning indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-30  
Parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-26  
Parking tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-27  
Break-in (New vehicle) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
7-3  
Brightness control (Illumination) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18  
Bulb replacement  
Bulb chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8  
Fog lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-52  
Front turn signal lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-55  
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-51  
Interior(Doom) light, spot lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-59  
License plate light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-59  
Parking lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-54  
Rear combination lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-57  
Side turn signal lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-56  
13-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
C
Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3  
Carbon monoxide (Engine exhaust gas) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
7-7  
Cargo anchorage eyelets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-25  
Cargo area (See “Luggage room”)  
Cassette player operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Catalytic converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Center console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Cup holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Lid tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
5-9  
7-8  
6-3  
6-7  
6-4  
Certification plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-9  
Chains (tire) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-41  
Changing the @@@  
Air cleaner element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-17  
Bulb (see “Bulb replacement”)  
Brake pad and lining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-39  
Changing a flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
8-6  
Engine coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13  
Engine oil and oil filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9  
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-46  
Spark plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-19  
Windshield wiper blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-34  
Charge warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
3-9  
CHECK ENGINE warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10  
Checking the @@@  
Automatic transmission fluid level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23  
Battery fluid level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-33  
Brake booster operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31  
Brake fluid level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29  
Brake pedal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-37  
Clutch fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31  
Clutch pedal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-38  
Engine coolant level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13  
Engine oil level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8  
Front differential gear oil level (AT vehicles) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24  
Manual transmission gear oil level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21  
13-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
Power steering fluid level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27/10-28  
Rear differential gear oil level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25  
Tire pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-41  
Windshield washer fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-33  
Child restraint systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21  
Installing child restraint systems in the 2-point type . . . . . . . . 2-23  
Installing child restraint systems in the 3-point type . . . . . . . . 2-24  
Top strap anchors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25  
Children’s  
Child restraint systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21  
Child safety lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
1-7  
Seating child in the 2-point type seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23  
Seating child in the 3-point type seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24  
Seat belt safety tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19  
Safety precautions when driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Foreword v  
Chime  
Key reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12  
Seat belt warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12  
Cigarette lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
6-9  
Circuit breakers (See “Fuses”)  
Cleaning  
Aluminum wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Exterior (Washing) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
9-5  
9-2  
9-6  
Climate control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Chapter 4  
Air filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11  
Air conditioner operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Operation tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Heater operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Heating or air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Ventilator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
4-8  
4-9  
4-4  
4-3  
4-2  
Clock function  
Combination meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14  
Audio system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11  
Clutch (Manual transmission)  
Clutch fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30  
13-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Clutch pedal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-38  
Coat hook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12  
Coin tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Combination meters  
6-5  
Combination meter overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Gauges (See “Gauges”)  
3-3  
Indicator lights (See “Warning lights”)  
Meters (See “Gauges”)  
Warning lights (See “Warning lights”)  
Coolant  
Changing the engine coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-15  
Checking the engine coolant level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13  
Cooling system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12  
Engine coolant capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3  
Engine overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Temperature gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Corrosion protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
8-2  
3-7  
9-4  
Cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-24  
Cup holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Driver’s side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Front passenger’s side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
6-6  
6-6  
6-7  
D
Daytime running light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16  
Defogging  
Rear window defogger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24  
Front window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
4-8  
Differential gear oil  
Front differential gear oil (AT vehicles) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24  
Leak . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7  
Rear differential gear oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25  
Disk brake pad wear warning indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-30  
Doom light (see “Interior light”)  
Doors  
Child safety lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Door open warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
1-7  
1-8  
13-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
Door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Power door locking switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
1-3  
1-6  
Drive belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-20  
Driving tips  
All wheel drive vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-33  
Automatic transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-21  
Foreign countries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10  
Fuel economy hints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
7-9  
Manual transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17  
Off road driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-34  
Winter season driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-37  
E
Economy hints (fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
7-9  
7-6  
Emergency on the road (See “In case of emergency”)  
Emission test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Engine  
Air cleaner element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-17  
7-8  
Catalytic converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
CHECK ENGINE warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10  
Compartment overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5  
Drive belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-20  
Engine hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-30  
Exhaust gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
7-7  
Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8  
Oil leak . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7  
Oil pressure indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
3-9  
8-2  
Safety precautions when driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Foreword vi  
Spark plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-19  
Start the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14  
Stopping the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16  
Engine coolant (See “Coolant”)  
Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8  
Changing the oil and oil filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9  
Checking the oil level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8  
13-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Oil capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3  
Oil leak . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7  
Oil pressure indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
3-9  
Expectant mothers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20  
Exterior  
Illustrated index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Foreword xii  
Washing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Waxing and polishing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
9-2  
9-3  
Eyelets  
Cargo anchorage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-25  
Towing eyelets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17  
F
Filter  
Air filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11  
Oil filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9  
Flat tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
8-6  
Flooded engine starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15  
Fluids  
Automatic transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-22  
Battery fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-32  
Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31  
Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3  
Clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30  
Engine (Oil) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8  
Front differential gear oil (AT vehicles) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24  
Leaks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7  
Manual transmission gear oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21  
Power steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27  
Pressure warning light (Engine oil) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
3-9  
Rear differential gear (Oil) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25  
Windshield washer fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-33  
Fog light  
Fog light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19  
Bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-52  
13-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
Front differential gear oil (Automatic transmission vehicles) . . . . . . . . . . 10-24  
Oil leak . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7  
Oil capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3  
Front seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
2-2  
Front turn signal lights (Bulb replacement) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-55  
Fuel  
Economy hints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
7-9  
Filler door and cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-28  
Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
3-6  
Fuel tank capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3  
Low fuel warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13  
Refueling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-29  
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
7-4  
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-46  
Fuse and circuits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-5  
Main fuse and fusible link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-49  
Replacing a fuse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-47  
FWD warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13  
G
Gasoline (see “Fuel”)  
Gate  
Sedan and coupe (Trunk lid) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25  
Wagon (Rear gate) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-27  
Gauges  
Combination meter overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
3-3  
3-6  
Illumination brightness control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18  
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Temperature gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Trip meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
3-5  
3-5  
3-6  
3-7  
3-5  
Gauge pack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14  
Glove compartment (box) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
6-3  
13-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
H
Hazard warning flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14  
Headlights  
Bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-55  
Daytime running light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16  
Headlight flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16  
Headlight switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15  
High beam indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13  
High/low beam change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16  
Head restraint adjustment (See “Seats”)  
Heater operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Heating and air conditioning (see “Climate control”)  
4-4  
Hood (Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-30  
Hook  
Cargo anchorage eyelets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-25  
Coat hook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12  
Shopping bag hook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-25  
Towing eyelets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17  
Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25  
I
Ignition switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11  
ACC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12  
Key interlock release (AT vehicle only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13  
Key reminder chime . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13  
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
1-2  
LOCK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11  
ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12  
START . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13  
Illumination brightness control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18  
In case of emergency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Chapter 8  
Engine overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Flat tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Hazard warning flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
8-2  
8-6  
8-2  
8-4  
Sunroof manual operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-31  
13-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14  
Indicator lights (See “Warning lights”)  
Inside mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25  
Installation of accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12/10-50  
Instrument panel overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Interior  
3-2  
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
9-6  
Illustrated index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Foreword xiii  
Interior light  
Interior light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12  
Interior light (Bulb replacement) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-59  
Spotlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13  
Spotlight (Bulb replacement) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-59  
Interlock release (AT vehicle only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13  
J
Jack and jack handle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13  
Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
8-4  
K
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
1-2  
Interlock release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13  
Key number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Keyless entry system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
1-2  
1-8  
Reminder chime . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13  
Security system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12  
L
Label (Vehicle identification) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-9  
Lamps (See “Light controls”)  
Leaks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7  
License plate light (Bulb replacement) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-59  
Lids  
Center console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
6-4  
Fuel filler door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-28  
Sedan and coupe (Trunk lid) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25  
13-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Wagon (Rear gate) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-27  
Light controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15  
Daytime running light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16  
Fog light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19  
Hazard warning flasher switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14  
Illumination brightness control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18  
Illustrated index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
3-4  
Light control switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15  
Parking light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18  
Replacement (See “Bulb replacement”)  
Turn signal lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17  
Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-42  
Roof rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-34  
LOCK (Ignition switch) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11  
Locks (Door and others)  
Child safety lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Glove compartment (Glove box) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Power door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
1-7  
1-3  
6-3  
1-6  
Trunk lid (Sedan and coupe) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25  
Rear gate (Wagon) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-27  
Low fuel warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13  
Luggage room (wagon only)  
Accessory power socket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
6-7  
Cargo anchorage eyelets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-25  
Illustrated index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Foreword xiv  
Luggage cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-23  
Shopping bag hook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-25  
M
Main fuse and fusible link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-49  
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Chapter 10  
Aluminum wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-46  
Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3  
Maintenance tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-26  
Parking brake stroke . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-40  
13-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20  
Malfunction indicator lamp (see “Warning light”)  
Manual transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16  
Checking the oil level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21  
Oil leak . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7  
Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14  
Transmission oil capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3  
Master key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
1-2  
Maximum load limits specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2  
Meters (Refer to “Gauges”)  
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25  
Inside mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25  
Outside mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26  
Outside mirror control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27  
Vanity mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
6-2  
7-3  
3-5  
N
New vehicle break-in driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
O
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Off road driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-34  
Oils (See “Fluids”)  
ON (Ignition switch) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12  
Outside mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26  
Outside mirror control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27  
Overheating the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
8-2  
P
Parking  
Parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-26  
Parking brake lining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-40  
Parking brake stroke . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-40  
Parking lights (Bulb replacement) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-54  
Parking light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18  
Parking tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-27  
13-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Pedal  
Brake pedal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-37  
Clutch pedal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-38  
Polishing (Exterior) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
9-3  
Periodic inspections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10  
Power door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
1-6  
Power steering  
Power steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-23  
Power steering fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27  
Fluid capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3  
Power window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22  
Preparing to drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10  
R
Radiator pressure cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13  
Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
5-3  
Rear combination lights (Bulb replacement) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-57  
Rear differential gear oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25  
Oil capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3  
Oil leak . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7  
Rear gate or trunk lid  
Sedan and coupe (Trunk lid) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25  
Wagon (Rear gate) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-27  
Rear seat access (Coupe) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Rear seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
2-5  
2-6  
Rear view mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25  
Rear window  
Defogger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24  
Wiper and washer switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22  
Reclining the seatback for front seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
2-4  
Remote control mirror switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27  
Replacement @@@(see “Changing the@@@”)  
Replacing bulbs (see “Bulb replacement”)  
Reporting safety defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-4  
Reserve tank  
Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29  
13-14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
Clutch fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30  
Engine coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13  
Power steering fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27  
Windshield washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-33  
Restraint child seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21  
Roof rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-34  
Rotation (Tire) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-41  
S
Safety precautions when driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Foreword iv  
Seat belts  
Children’s (Safety tips) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19  
Expectant mothers (Safety tips) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20  
Maintenance (Safety tips) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20  
Safety tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19  
Seat belt warning chime . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12  
Seat belt warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12  
Seat belts — 3-point type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10  
ALR (Automatic Locking Retractor) function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12  
ELR (Emergency Locking Retractor) function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12  
Fastening the seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13  
Unfastening the seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14  
Seat belt guide (Coupe) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15  
Shoulder belt anchor height (Sedan or Wagon) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14  
Seat belt — 2-point type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16  
Fastening the seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17  
Unfastening the seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18  
Seats  
Child restraint systems (see “Child restraint seats”)  
Fabric cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Front seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Fold down rear seat (Wagon) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Fore and aft adjustment for front seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Head restraint adjustment for front seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Rear seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Rear seat access for front seat (Coupe) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
9-6  
2-2  
2-7  
2-4  
2-5  
2-6  
2-5  
13-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Reclining the seatback for front seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Synthetic leather cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
2-4  
9-6  
Security system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12  
Selector lever (Automatic transmission vehicles) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-19  
Shift lever (Manual transmission vehicles) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16  
Shift lock release (Automatic transmission vehicles) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-21  
Shopping bag hook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-25  
Side turn signal lights  
Bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-56  
Turn signal to ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17  
Snow tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-40  
Spare tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13  
Changing a flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
8-6  
Jack and jack handle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13  
Temporary spare tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11  
Spark plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-19  
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2  
Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3  
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2  
Electrical system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3  
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2  
Maximum load limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2  
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-4  
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
3-5  
Spotlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13  
Bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-59  
SRS AIRBAG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28  
SRS AIRBAG warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
3-8  
System operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32  
System monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-36  
System services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-37  
Vehicle modification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-38  
START (Ignition switch) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13  
Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14  
Automatic transmission vehicles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14  
During cold weather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15  
13-16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
Flooded engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15  
Manual transmission vehicles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14  
State emission testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
7-6  
Steering wheels  
Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25  
Power steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-23  
SRS AIRBAG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28  
Tilt steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-23  
Stop light (Bulb replacement) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-57  
Stopping the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16  
Storage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Center console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Coin tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Dashboard storage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Glove compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Submaster key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
6-2  
6-3  
6-5  
6-5  
6-3  
1-2  
Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-31  
Sun visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
6-2  
T
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
3-6  
Temporary spare tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11  
Temperature gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
3-7  
Three-point type seat belt (see “Seat belts — 3-point type”)  
Tilt steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-23  
Time setting  
Combination meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14  
Audio system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11  
Timing belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-20  
Tires and wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-41  
Air pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-41  
Aluminum wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-46  
Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-41  
Flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
8-6  
Changing tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13  
13-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Jack and jack handle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13  
Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-41  
Snow tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-40  
Spare tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13  
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-4  
Temporary spare tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11  
Uniformity tire quality grading standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2  
Wheel covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-43/10-45  
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-26  
Top strap anchor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25  
Towing tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14  
Towing eyelets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17  
Trailer towing tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-44  
Transmission  
AT vehicles (See “Automatic transmission”)  
MT vehicles (See “Manual transmissions”)  
Trip meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Trunk lid or Rear gate  
3-5  
Sedan and coupe (Trunk lid) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25  
Wagon (Rear gate) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-27  
Turn signals  
Turn signal indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13  
Turn signal switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17  
Two-point type seat belt (see “Seat belt — 2-point type”)  
U
Uniformity tire quality grading standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2  
V
Valet key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Vanity mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
1-2  
6-2  
Vehicle capacity weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-43  
Vehicle identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-9  
Ventilation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
4-2  
13-18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
W
Warning lights (Indicator lights)  
ABS warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11  
3-8  
AIRBAG warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
AT OIL TEMP warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12  
Brake system warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Charge warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
3-9  
3-9  
CHECK ENGINE warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10  
Door open warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13  
FWD warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13  
High beam indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13  
Low fuel warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13  
Malfunction indicator lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10  
Oil pressure warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Seat belt warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
3-9  
3-8  
Turn signal indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13  
Warranties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Foreword I  
Washer  
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-33  
Front/rear washer switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22/3-23  
Washing (Exterior) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Waxing (Exterior) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Wheels (see “Tires and wheels”)  
9-2  
9-3  
Windows  
Power window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22  
Rear window defogger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24  
Manually window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
1-8  
Winter season driving tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-37  
Snow tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-40  
Tire chain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-41  
Wiper controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20  
Illustrated index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
3-4  
Mist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22  
Rear window wiper and washer switch (Wagon only) . . . . . . 3-22  
Replacement wiper blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-34  
Washer (front/rear) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22/3-23  
13-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Windshield washer fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-33  
Wiper control switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21  
13-20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Warranties  
B Warranties for U.S.A.  
All SUBARU vehicles distributed by Subaru of America, Inc. and sold  
at retail by an authorized SUBARU dealer in the United States come  
with the following warranties:  
D SUBARU Limited Warranty  
D Emission Control Systems Warranty  
D Emissions Performance Warranty  
All warranty information, including details of coverage and exclusions,  
is in the Warranty and Maintenance Booklet. Please read these war-  
ranties carefully.  
B Warranties for Canada  
All SUBARU vehicles distributed by Subaru Canada, Inc. and sold at  
retail by an authorized SUBARU dealer in Canada come with the fol-  
lowing warranties:  
D SUBARU Limited Warranty  
D Anti-Corrosion Warranty  
D Emission Control Warranty  
All warranty information, including details of coverage and exclusions,  
is in the Warranty and Service Booklet. Please read these warranties  
carefully.  
i
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Doors and locks  
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Master, submaster and valet key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Key number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
1-2  
1-2  
1-2  
1
Door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Locking and unlocking from the outside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Locking and unlocking from the inside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Power door locking switches (if equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Child safety locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
1-3  
1-3  
1-5  
1-6  
1-7  
Door open warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
1-8  
Keyless entry system (if equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
System operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Programming button location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Adding or deleting remote transmitters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
System maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
1-8  
1-9  
1-10  
1-11  
1-11  
Security system (if equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12  
How the security system protects your vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Security system components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Security system operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
System maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Trouble shooting guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
1-12  
1-14  
1-16  
1-21  
1-21  
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22  
Power windows (if equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22  
Power window switch cluster (driver’s side) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Passenger’s switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
1-23  
1-24  
Trunk lid (Sedan and Coupe) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25  
To open and close the trunk lid from outside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
To open the trunk lid from inside  
1-25  
(vehicle with trunk lid release lever) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
1-26  
Rear gate (Wagon) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-27  
To open and close the rear gate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Fuel filler door and cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-28  
1-27  
To open and close the fuel filler door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Fuel filler cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Refueling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
1-28  
1-29  
1-29  
Engine hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-30  
Sunroof (if equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-31  
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Manual operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
1-31  
1-33  
Roof rack (if equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-34  
When luggage is put on the slats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Installing carrying attachments on the cross bars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
1-34  
1-35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Keys  
Submaster key  
Master key  
Valet key  
Key number  
HG0362  
J Master, submaster and valet key  
Three types of keys are provided for your vehicle.  
Master key, submaster key and valet key.  
The master key and submaster key fit all locks on your vehicle.  
D Ignition switch  
D Doors  
D Trunk or Rear gate  
D Glove compartment  
The valet key fits only the ignition switch and door locks. You can keep  
the trunk and glove compartment locked when you leave your vehicle  
and valet key at a parking facility.  
J Key number  
The key number is stamped on the metal plate attached to the key. Write  
down the key number and keep it in another safe place, not in the ve-  
hicle. This number is needed to make a replacement key if you lose your  
key or lock it inside the vehicle.  
1-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Doors and locks  
Door locks  
J Locking and unlocking from the outside  
B For Vehicles with power door locking switches  
Unlock  
Lock  
OM-H0387  
To lock the door from the outside with the key, turn the key toward the  
rear. To unlock the door, turn the key toward the front.  
Lift the outside door handle to open an unlocked door.  
Locking without the key  
Locking without the key  
1
Press the  
lock lever  
1
2
2
Close the  
door while  
hold the  
1 Push the power door locking  
switch rearward.  
2 Close the door.  
handle up.  
OM-H0008  
HG0333  
To lock the door from the outside without the key, press the end of the  
lock lever down on the door and then close the door.  
To lock the door from the outside using the power door locking switch,  
push the switch rearward (“LOCK” side) and then close the door. In  
this case, all closed doors and the rear gate (for wagon) are locked at  
– CONTINUED –  
1-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
the same time. Always make sure that all doors and the rear gate (for  
wagon) are locked before leaving your vehicle.  
NOTE  
Make sure that you do not leave the key inside the vehicle before  
locking the doors from the outside without the key.  
B For vehicles without power door locking switches  
Unlock  
Lock  
387  
To lock the door from the outside with the key, turn the key toward the  
rear. To unlock the door, turn the key toward the front.  
Lift the outside door handle to open an unlocked door.  
Locking without the key  
Locking without the key  
1
Press the  
lock lever  
2
Close the  
door while  
hold the  
1 Push the power door locking  
switch rearward.  
2 Close the door.  
handle up.  
OM-H0008  
HG0334  
To lock the front door from the outside without the key, press the end  
of the lock lever down on the door and hold the outside door handle  
up while closing the door.  
1-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Doors and locks  
To lock the rear door from the outside without the key, press the end  
of the lock lever down on the door and then close the door.  
Always make sure that all doors and the rear gate (for wagon) are  
locked before leaving your vehicle.  
NOTE  
Make sure that you do not leave the key inside the vehicle before  
locking the doors from the outside without the key.  
J Locking and unlocking from the inside  
Red mark  
Inside door handle  
Lock  
Unlock  
To lock the door from the inside, press the end of the lock lever down. To  
unlock the door from the inside, pull the front end of the lock lever.  
The red mark on the lock lever appears when the door is unlocked.  
Pull the inside door handle to open an unlocked door.  
Always make sure that all doors and the rear gate (for wagon) are closed  
before starting to drive.  
– CONTINUED –  
1-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
J Power door locking switches (if equipped)  
Driver’s switch  
Front passenger’s switch  
Unlock  
Unlock  
Lock  
Lock  
35  
All doors and the rear gate can be locked and unlocked by the power  
door locking switches at the driver’s side and the front passenger’s side  
doors.  
To lock the doors, push the switch rearward.  
To unlock the doors, push the switch forward.  
When you close the doors after you set the door locks, the doors remain  
locked.  
NOTE  
Make sure that you do not leave the key inside the vehicle before  
locking the doors from the outside using power door locking  
switches.  
1-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Doors and locks  
J Child safety locks  
Unlock  
Lock  
HG0267  
WARNING  
Always use the child safety lock whenever a child rides in the  
rear seat. Serious injury could result if a child accidentally  
opened the door and fell out.  
Each rear door has a child safety lock that prevents the doors from being  
opened even if the inside door handle is pulled.  
When the child safety lock lever is in the lock position, the door cannot  
be opened from inside regardless of the position of the inner door handle  
lock lever. The door can only be opened from the outside.  
1-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Door open warning lights  
HG0336  
The door open warning light comes on if any door is not fully closed.  
Always make sure this light is out before starting to drive.  
Keyless entry system (if equipped)  
CAUTION  
D Do not expose the transmitter to severe shocks, such as those  
experienced as a result of dropping or throwing.  
D Do not take the transmitter apart except when replacing the  
battery.  
D Do not get the transmitter wet. If it gets wet, wipe it dry with a  
cloth immediately.  
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is  
subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not  
cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any  
interference received, including interference that may cause  
undesired operation.  
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party  
responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to  
operate the equipment.  
1-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Doors and locks  
The keyless entry system has following functions.  
D Locking and unlocking the doors (and rear gate on the wagon) with-  
out a key  
D Arming and disarming the security system (if your vehicle is equipped  
with an optional security system). See the next section “Security system  
(if equipped)” for detailed information.  
The receiver inside your vehicle’s keyless entry system and the remote  
control transmitters are designed together to have an average operating  
range of 25 to 50 feet (8 to 15 meters) during ideal conditions. Although  
at times you may experience range greater than that, there may be occa-  
sions when range is less than normal. Atmospheric conditions or interfer-  
ence from other RF-emitting devices can effectively reduce transmitter  
range.  
J System operation  
Keyless entry functions do not operate when vehicle ignition is “ON”.  
HS1000BB  
B Locking the doors  
Press the “LOCK” button to lock all doors (and the rear gate on the  
wagon). The parking lights will flash one time.  
B Unlocking the doors  
To unlock the driver’s door only, press and release the “UNLOCK” but-  
ton.  
– CONTINUED –  
1-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
To unlock all doors (and the rear gate on the wagon), press and hold  
the “UNLOCK” button.  
The parking lights will flash one time.  
The vehicle’s interior (courtesy) light will illuminate for 60 seconds or  
until vehicle is started.  
NOTE  
1. Parking lights will flash when the vehicle’s battery is disconnected  
and reconnected.  
To stop lights from flashing, either:  
D Press remote transmitter “UNLOCK” button once.  
D Turn the ignition switch to the “ON” position and press programming  
button for one second (see location below).  
2. The vehicle’s interior (courtesy) light and door open warning light  
(DOOR AJAR indicator) will illuminate for 60 seconds when the ignition is  
turned off, or until the doors are locked with the remote transmitter.  
3. The instrument panel lights will flash when the parking lights flash.  
4. Your SUBARU Keyless Entry System is equipped with two remote  
transmitters.  
J Programming button location  
HS1001BB  
The Programming Button is located under the driver’s side dash  
beneath the diagnostic connector.  
1-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Doors and locks  
J Adding or deleting remote transmitters  
Up to four (4) transmitters can be programmed to your keyless entry sys-  
tem.  
NOTE  
Make sure no one else is operating another keyless entry or security sys-  
tem within range of your vehicle when you are programming remote  
transmitters. Another transmitter code could be inadvertently “learned”  
by your system, allowing someone unauthorized access to your vehicle.  
B To program an additional transmitter  
1. Open the driver’s door.  
2. Turn the vehicle ignition to the “ON” position.  
3. Press and hold the Programming button in.  
D After approximately 15 seconds, the door locks will cycle 3 times.  
This indicates that the system is in the Transmitter Programming  
Mode. Do not release the Programming button.  
4. Press the “LOCK” button on the new transmitter. The door locks will  
cycle once.  
5. Repeat step 4 for any additional transmitters.  
6. Exit the Transmitter Program Mode by releasing the Programming  
button and turning the vehicle ignition off. Test all remote transmitters  
to ensure that they work properly.  
B To delete a lost or stolen transmitter  
1. Follow step 1 to 3 as described above.  
2. Re-program the remaining transmitters as described in step 4.  
D If there is only one remaining transmitter, perform step 4 four  
times.  
D If there are two remaining transmitters, perform step 4 twice for  
each transmitter.  
J System maintenance  
Your keyless entry system does not require any specific maintenance  
except for occasionally changing the transmitter battery. The 12-volt bat-  
tery in the remote transmitter should last approximately one year,  
depending on usage. When the battery begins to weaken, you will notice  
– CONTINUED –  
1-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
a decrease in range, or the distance from your vehicle that the remote  
transmitter will operate.  
B To change the remote transmitter battery  
CAUTION  
Do not let dust, oil or water get on or in the transmitter when  
replacing the battery.  
HS1002BA  
HS1003BB  
1. Remove the phillips screw on the back of the remote transmitter  
case. Use a small coin to separate the case halves and expose the  
battery.  
2. Remove the old battery and replace with type GP-23A or equiva-  
lent.  
3. Close the transmitter case and replace the screw.  
Security system (if equipped)  
J How the security system protects your vehicle  
B Starter interrupt  
The vehicle’s starter is disabled when the system is armed with your  
remote transmitter.  
1-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Doors and locks  
B Passive starter interrupt (if selected)  
The vehicle starter is automatically disabled one minute after the igni-  
tion is turned off, even if the system has not been armed with your  
remote transmitter. (This option may be activated by your SUBARU  
dealer for an additional charge.)  
NOTE  
If the Passive Starter Interrupt Option is enabled on your system, pay  
special attention to the Starter Interrupt Section.  
B All entrances protected  
Opening any door or entrance protected by the security system trig-  
gers the alarm’s 125 db siren and flashes the vehicle’s parking lights.  
B Shock Sensor  
The shock sensor detects any impact to the vehicle. Light impact will  
cause the siren to emit a warning “chirp”; heavier blows will trigger  
the alarm. (Shock sensor sensitivity has been preset, but may be  
adjusted by your SUBARU dealer.)  
B Personal protection (Panic) feature  
Pressing both buttons on the remote transmitter activates the Panic  
feature, sounding the siren and flashing the vehicle’s parking lights.  
B Interior status indicator  
The bright-red warning light provides a visual deterrent to a would-be  
thief.  
B Emergency override button  
Ensures that you will be able to disarm your alarm system and start  
your vehicle if your remote transmitter is lost or broken. See Emer-  
gency Override Button Location Section.  
– CONTINUED –  
1-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
J Security system components  
B The remote transmitter  
The remote transmitter controls the features and options of the secu-  
rity system.  
HS1000CB  
The security system can be programmed to operate with one to four  
remote transmitters. Each transmitter is powered by an internal 12-volt  
alkaline battery.  
B The status indicator/Valet button  
HS1004BB  
The Status Indicator is a high intensity warning light, located on the  
dash to the left of the steering wheel. The Status Indicator displays a  
visual indication of the security system’s status while creating a pow-  
erful theft deterrent.  
1-14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Doors and locks  
LED status  
Off: System is disarmed.  
Double-Flash: System is in valet mode.  
Steady Flash: System is armed.  
Fast Flash: System has been triggered.  
On: System is in pre-arm state (and will arm when all doors are  
closed).  
B The valet button (built into the status indicator)  
The Valet Button is used to engage Valet Mode (see Valet Mode Sec-  
tion). In Valet Mode, the security system will not arm, through the siren  
will chirp and keyless entry features will function when the security  
system is disarmed.  
B The emergency override/programming button  
HS1001BC  
The Emergency Override/Programming button is used to disarm the  
alarm system in case of a lost or broken transmitter. It is also used in  
conjunction with the transmitter and vehicle ignition to program addi-  
tional transmitters.  
The Emergency Override Button is located under the driver’s side  
dash beneath the diagnostic connector.  
– CONTINUED –  
1-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
J Security system operation  
IMPORTANT  
Security System and Keyless Entry Features Do Not Operate when  
the Vehicle Ignition is on.  
B Arming the system  
HS1000DB  
To arm the system, close all doors, then press the “LOCK” button. The  
siren will “chirp” twice and the parking lights will flash twice, indicat-  
ing the system is armed.  
The doors will also lock at this time. The status indicator will blink  
steadily, once per second.  
If the siren chirps and/or the parking lights flash only once, this indi-  
cates that the system is in pre-arm mode. The system has detected  
that a protected entrance is not secured. In pre-arm mode, the status  
indicator stays on and does not blink. Check to see that all vehicle  
entrances are closed securely. Once all entrances are secured, the  
system will chirp/flash again, and the status indicator will blink  
steadily. The system is now fully armed.  
1-16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Doors and locks  
B Disarming the system  
HS1000EB  
To disarm the system, press and release the “UNLOCK” button. The  
siren will chirp and parking lights will flash once. The driver’s door will  
unlock at this time, and the vehicle interior (dome) light will turn on for  
60 seconds, or until the vehicle is started.  
If the siren chirps and parking lights flash four times, the system was  
triggered in your absence. Refer to the Trip Identification section in  
this manual.  
B The alarm cycle  
If your alarm system is triggered, the siren will sound and the parking  
lights will flash for 60 seconds. After this duration, the system will  
check to see if an entrance was left open. If so, the alarm will continue  
to sound. If not, the system will re-arm.  
– CONTINUED –  
1-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
B Personal protection alarm (Panic)  
HS1000BC  
Pressing both buttons together on the remote transmitter activates the  
Panic feature, sounding the siren and flashing the parking lights.  
Panic is designed to bring attention to the vehicle and surrounding  
area. Press either button on the transmitter to turn off the Panic alarm.  
B Disarming the security system in the event of a lost or broken  
transmitter  
HS1001CB  
If your remote transmitter fails to operate, the system can be dis-  
armed using the Emergency Override/Programming button. Follow  
the procedure below:  
1. Enter the vehicle. The alarm will sound when the door is opened.  
2. Insert the ignition key and turn to the “ON” position.  
1-18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Doors and locks  
3. Press the Emergency Override/Programming button. The system  
will disarm.  
B Valet mode  
HS1004CB  
Valet Mode prevents the security system from arming, yet allows all  
keyless entry and convenience features to function normally.  
The valet button is built into the status indicator, located on the dash  
to the left of the steering wheel.  
To engage Valet Mode:  
D With the system disarmed and the vehicle ignition off, press the  
Status Indicator/Valet Button.  
D The status indicator will begin to emit a quick double-flash pattern.  
This indicates that the system is in Valet Mode.  
D To exit Valet Mode, press the Status Indicator/Valet Button again.  
The status indicator will turn off, indicating the system is in normal  
operating mode.  
B Trip identification  
If the siren chirps four times when you disarm your security system,  
this indicates that the system was triggered in your absence. Before  
turning the ignition on, perform the following operation to determine  
the protected zone that triggered the system.  
D Open the vehicle door and press the Emergency Override/Pro-  
gramming button.  
– CONTINUED –  
1-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
D The siren will emit a number of chirps. Refer to the chart (below) to  
identify the violated zone.  
Chirps  
Triggered Zone  
Shock Sensor  
1
2
4
Ignition turned on  
Door or Rear gate  
B Starter interrupt  
Starter interrupt is an automatic procedure. The starter is disabled  
any time the system is armed, or if the Passive starter interrupt fea-  
ture is enabled and the passive arm time is expired. The vehicle also  
will not start if power is disconnected from the alarm module.  
How starter interrupt works  
The alarm system interrupts the signal from the ignition key to the ve-  
hicle’s starter when Starter interrupt is activated. If you attempt to start  
the vehicle, the dash indicator will turn on as usual, but the starter will  
not “crank”, or turn over.  
Passive starter interrupt  
If the Passive Starter Interrupt option has been activated by your  
SUBARU dealer, the starter will be automatically disabled one minute  
after you turn off the vehicle ignition, whether or not you arm the secu-  
rity system with your remote transmitter.  
Possible situations with starter interrupt or Passive starter inter-  
rupt  
If the Passive Starter Interrupt Option is enabled on your Security  
System:  
D If you leave the vehicle for a short amount of time, to refuel or go to  
the car wash for example, always engage the Valet Mode before exit-  
ing your vehicle. If you forget to engage Valet Mode, the Passive  
Starter Interrupt will engage and the vehicle will not start when you  
return. To enable the vehicle to start, simply press “UNLOCK” on  
1-20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Doors and locks  
your remote transmitter, or turn the vehicle ignition to the “ON”  
position and press the Emergency Override/programming button  
in and release.  
D If your remote transmitter is lost or broken and the Passive Starter  
Interrupt has automatically engaged, enter the vehicle, turn the igni-  
tion to the “ON” position, and press the Emergency Override/pro-  
gramming button. This will enable the vehicle to start.  
Whether or Not the Passive Starter Interrupt Option is Activated:  
D In the unlikely event of an alarm system malfunction, your vehicle  
may not start. To enable the vehicle to start, press and hold the  
Emergency Override/programming button, and attempt to start  
the vehicle while holding the button in.  
J System maintenance  
Your security system does not require any specific maintenance except  
for occasionally changing the transmitter battery. However, it is sug-  
gested that the system be armed and all protected zones be checked  
about once a month to make sure that they trigger an alarm cycle.  
To change the remote transmitter battery, refer to System Maintenance  
Section under the heading of Keyless Entry System.  
J Trouble shooting guide  
B If you experience any of the following situations...  
D Your remote transmitter is lost or broken and your alarm sys-  
tem is armed.  
D You attempt to start your vehicle after pressing “UNLOCK” on  
your remote transmitter and it does not “crank”.  
Perform the following procedure:  
1. Use your keys to enter the vehicle. (Depending on your situa-  
tion, the alarm may sound when you open the door.)  
2. Insert your key into the ignition and turn to the “ON” position.  
3. Press and release the Emergency Override Button. The alarm  
system will disarm and you will be able to start your vehicle.  
4. If your vehicle still will not start, press and HOLD the Emer-  
gency Override Button in while attempting to start your vehicle.  
1-21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Windows  
HG0270  
Turn the handle to open or close the window.  
Power windows (if equipped)  
WARNING  
D When operating power windows, be extremely careful to pre-  
vent anyone’s fingers or head from being caught in the window.  
D Always lock the passenger’s windows using the lock switch  
when children are riding in the vehicle.  
D Before leaving the vehicle, always remove the key from the  
ignition switch for safety if a child remains in the vehicle. Failure  
to follow this procedure could result in injury to a child operating  
the power window.  
The power windows operate only when the ignition switch is in the “ON”  
position.  
1-22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Doors and locks  
J Power window switch cluster (driver’s side)  
Lock switch  
“AUTO” switch for  
driver’s window  
For front  
passenger’s  
window  
For rear left  
passenger’s  
window  
For rear right  
passenger’s  
window  
HG0337  
Lock Unlock  
Close  
Open  
Close  
Open  
Automatically  
open  
HG0338  
All door windows can be controlled by the power window switch cluster  
at the driver side door.  
B To open or close the driver’s window  
AUTO switch: This switch has two functions.  
Push the switch down until it clicks and release it, and the window will  
fully open. To stop the window halfway, pull the switch up lightly.  
Push the switch down lightly and hold it. The window will open as long  
as the switch is held.  
Pull the switch up lightly and hold it. The window will close as long as  
the switch is held.  
– CONTINUED –  
1-23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
B To open or close the passengers’ windows  
To open the passengers’ windows, push the appropriate switch down  
and hold it until the window reaches the desired position. To close the  
window, pull the switch up and hold it until it reaches the desired posi-  
tion.  
B To lock the passengers’ windows  
To lock the passengers’ windows, push the lock switch. When the lock  
switch is in the “LOCK” position, the passengers’ windows cannot be  
opened or closed.  
J Passenger’s switches  
HG0284  
To open the window, push the switch down and hold it until the window  
reaches the desired position. To close the window, pull the switch up and  
hold it until the window reaches the desired position.  
When the lock switch on the power window switch cluster, located on the  
driver’s side door, is in the “LOCK” position, the front passenger’s win-  
dow cannot be operated with the front passenger’s switch.  
1-24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Doors and locks  
Trunk lid (Sedan and Coupe)  
WARNING  
To prevent dangerous exhaust gas from entering the vehicle, al-  
ways keep the trunk lid closed while driving.  
J To open and close the trunk lid from outside  
Open  
H0016  
To open the trunk lid from outside, insert the key in the keyhole and turn it  
clockwise. To close the trunk lid, lightly press the trunk lid down until the  
latch engages.  
– CONTINUED –  
1-25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
J To open the trunk lid from inside (vehicle with trunk lid release  
lever)  
HG0003  
Pull the trunk lid release lever upward.  
B To cancel the trunk lid release  
OM-H0018  
The inside trunk lid release can be cancelled to help prevent unautho-  
rized entry into the trunk. To cancel the trunk lid release, set the lid  
release cancel lever (located on the inside of the trunk lid, mounted to  
the trunk lid latch) to the “CANCEL” position. When this lock is in the  
“CANCEL” position, the trunk can be opened only by the master key.  
1-26  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Doors and locks  
Rear gate (Wagon)  
WARNING  
To prevent dangerous exhaust gas from entering the vehicle, al-  
ways keep the rear gate closed while driving.  
J To open and close the rear gate  
Unlock  
Lock  
To unlock the rear gate, insert the key in the keyhole and turn it clock-  
wise. To lock the rear gate, insert the key in the keyhole and turn it coun-  
terclockwise. If your vehicle is equipped with power door locks, the rear  
gate can also be locked and unlocked through use of the power door  
lock system. Refer to the Power Door Locks section in this chapter.  
To open the rear gate, first unlock the rear gate lock then pull the outside  
handle up. To close the rear gate, lower it slowly and push down firmly  
until the latch engages.  
1-27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Fuel filler door and cap  
WARNING  
D Gasoline vapor is highly flammable. Before refueling, always  
first stop the engine and make sure that there are no lighted ciga-  
rettes, open flames or electrical sparks in the adjacent area.  
D When opening the cap, do not remove the cap quickly. Fuel  
may be under pressure and spray out of the fuel filler neck espe-  
cially in hot weather, which may cause injury.  
CAUTION  
Never add any cleaning agents to the fuel tank. The addition of a  
cleaning agent may cause damage to the fuel system.  
For choosing the right fuel for your SUBARU, refer to the “Fuel Require-  
ments” section located in chapter 7.  
J To open and close the fuel filler door  
To open the fuel filler door, pull it outward. After refueling, be sure to  
close the fuel filler door completely.  
1-28  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Doors and locks  
J Fuel filler cap  
CAUTION  
D Make sure that the cap is tightened until it clicks to prevent  
fuel spillage in the event of an accident.  
D Always use a genuine SUBARU fuel filler cap. If you use the  
wrong cap, it may not fit or have proper venting, and your fuel  
tank and emission control system might be damaged.  
HG0005, HG0006  
To take off the fuel filler cap, turn it slowly counterclockwise and remove  
the cap. While refueling, hang the cap on the cap holder inside the fuel  
lid.  
To put the cap back on, turn it clockwise until you hear a clicking noise.  
NOTE  
If the fuel filler cap is not tightened until it clicks, the CHECK EN-  
GINE warning light may come on. Refer to the “Warning and Indica-  
tor Lights” section located in chapter 3.  
J Refueling  
After the fuel filler nozzle has automatically stopped, do not add any  
more fuel.  
If you spill any fuel on the painted surface, rinse it off immediately. Other-  
wise, the painted surface could be damaged. Such damage is not cov-  
ered under the SUBARU Limited Warranty.  
1-29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Engine hood  
WARNING  
Always check that the hood is properly locked before you start  
driving. If it is not, it might fly open while the vehicle is moving,  
blocking your view which may cause an accident and serious  
bodily injury.  
H02
HG0059  
HG0060  
To open the hood:  
1. Pull the hood release knob under the instrument panel.  
2. Release the secondary hood release located under the front of the  
engine hood by moving the lever toward the left. Lift up the hood, release  
the hood prop from its retainer and put the end of the hood prop into the  
slot in the hood.  
1-30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Doors and locks  
To close the hood:  
1. Lift the hood slightly and remove the hood prop from the slot in the  
hood and return the prop to its retainer.  
2. Lower the hood until it approaches about 6 in. (15 cm) from the  
closed position and let it drop.  
3. After closing the hood, be sure the hood is securely locked.  
If this does not close the hood, release it from a slightly higher position.  
Do not push the hood forcibly to close it. It could deform the engine  
hood.  
Sunroof (if equipped)  
WARNING  
D Never let anyone’s hands, arms, head or any objects protrude  
from the sunroof.  
D Before closing the sunroof, make sure that no one’s hands,  
arms, head or other objects will be accidentally caught in the  
sunroof.  
CAUTION  
D Do not sit on the edge of the open sunroof.  
D Do not operate the sunroof if falling snow or extremely cold  
conditions have caused it to freeze shut.  
J Operation  
The sunroof operates only when the ignition switch is in the “ON” posi-  
tion.  
– CONTINUED –  
1-31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
OM-H0027  
B To open the sunroof  
Push the rear side of the switch marked “Y”, and the sunroof will tilt  
up.  
Release the switch once and push it again to slide the sunroof open.  
After washing the vehicle or after there is rain, wipe away any water  
on the roof prior to opening the sunroof to prevent water drops from  
falling into the passenger compartment.  
B To close the sunroof  
Push the front side of the switch marked “B”, and the sunroof will  
close. The sunroof will stop halfway if you continue to press on the  
switch. Release the switch once and push it again to close the sun-  
roof completely.  
Release the switch after the sunroof has closed completely or has  
tilted up. Pushing the switch continuously may cause damage to the  
sunroof.  
1-32  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Doors and locks  
J Manual operation  
OM-H0029  
If the sunroof can not be closed with the sunroof switch, you can close  
the roof manually.  
1. Take out the hex-headed wrench and screwdriver from the tool bag.  
2. Remove the plug on the roof trim by inserting the end of the regular  
screwdriver between the roof and plug and plying it off.  
3. Insert the wrench in the end of the motor shaft.  
D To lower the sunroof, turn the wrench clockwise.  
D To close the sunroof, turn the wrench counterclockwise.  
Have your vehicle checked by an authorized SUBARU dealer.  
1-33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Roof rack (if equipped)  
CAUTION  
When using the roof rack, make sure that the total carrying ca-  
pacity of the roof rack and luggage does not exceed the maxi-  
mum load limit. Overloading may cause damage to the vehicle  
and create a safety hazard.  
Roof rack  
HG0294  
When you carry cargo on the roof using the roof rack, never exceed the  
maximum load limit explained below. In addition, be careful that your ve-  
hicle does not exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) and  
front and rear Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). See the Loading Your  
Vehicle section in chapter 7 for information on loading cargo into or onto  
your vehicle.  
J When luggage is put on the slats  
When using the roof rack, make sure the total load capacity of the lug-  
gage on the slats does not exceed 40 lb. (18 kg). Overloading may  
cause damage to the roof and create a safety hazard. Place the heaviest  
load at the bottom, nearest the roof, and evenly distribute the luggage.  
Always secure the luggage with straps, ropes or nets.  
1-34  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Doors and locks  
J Installing carrying attachments on the cross bars  
When installing any carrying attachment such as a bike carrier, ski carri-  
er, canoe carrier, etc. on the cross bars, follow the manufacturer’s  
instructions and make sure that the attachment is securely fixed to the  
cross bars. Use only attachments designed specifically for the cross-  
bars. A set of the cross bars is designed to carry loads (luggage and  
attachment) of not more than 100 lb. (45 kg). Before operating the  
vehicle, make sure that the cargo is properly secured on the attachment.  
NOTE  
Remember that the vehicle’s center of gravity is altered with the weight of  
the load on the roof, thus affecting the driving characteristics.  
Drive carefully. Avoid rapid starts, hard cornering and abrupt stops.  
Crosswind effects will be increased.  
1-35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Seat, seat belt and  
SRS AIRBAG  
Front seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Fore and aft adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Reclining the seatback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Head restraint adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Rear seat access (Coupe) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
2-2  
2-4  
2-4  
2-5  
2-5  
2
Rear seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Fold down rear seat — Wagon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
2-6  
2-7  
3-point type seat belts (combination lap/shoulder belts) . . . 2-10  
Seat belt warning light and chime . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Fastening the seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Unfastening the belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Adjusting the shoulder belt anchor height (Sedan and Wagon)  
Seat belt guide (Coupe) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
2-12  
2-12  
2-12  
2-13  
2-14  
2-14  
2-15  
2-point type seat belt (lap only belt) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16  
Fastening the seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Unfastening the belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
2-17  
2-18  
Seat belt safety tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19  
Infants or small children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Expectant mothers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
2-19  
2-19  
2-20  
2-20  
Child restraint systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21  
Installing child restraint systems in the 2-point type seat belt  
position (Rear center seating position) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23  
Installing child restraint systems in the 3-point type seat belt  
position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24  
Top strap anchors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
2-25  
SRS AIRBAG (Supplemental Restraint System Airbag) . . . . . 2-28  
Vehicle with driver’s and front passenger’s SRS AIRBAGs  
and lap/shoulder restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
SRS AIRBAG System operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
System monitors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
System servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Precautions against vehicle modification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
2-28  
2-32  
2-36  
2-37  
2-38  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Front seats  
WARNING  
D Never adjust the seat while driving to avoid the possibility of  
loss of vehicle control and of personal injury.  
D Never drive the vehicle with the head restraints removed be-  
cause they are designed to reduce the risk of serious neck injury  
in the event that the vehicle is struck from the rear.  
D Before adjusting the seat, make sure the hands and feet of rear  
seat passengers are clear of the adjusting mechanism.  
D Seat belts provide maximum restraint when the occupant sits  
well back and upright in the seat. To reduce the risk of sliding un-  
der the seat belt in a collision, the front seatbacks should be al-  
ways used in the upright position while the vehicle is running. If  
the front seatbacks are not used in the upright position in a colli-  
sion, the risk of sliding under the lap belt and of the lap belt slid-  
ing up over the abdomen will increase, and both can result in se-  
rious internal injury or death.  
D Do not put cushions or any other materials between occupants  
and seatbacks or seat cushions. If you do so, the risk of sliding  
under the lap belt and of the lap belt sliding up over the abdomen  
will increase, and both can result in serious internal injury or death.  
D The SRS AIRBAGs deploy with considerable speed and force.  
Occupants who are out of proper position when the SRS AIRBAG  
deploys could suffer very serious injuries. Because the SRS AIR-  
BAG needs enough space for deployment, the driver should al-  
ways sit upright and well back in the seat as far from the steering  
wheel as practical while still maintaining full vehicle control and  
the front passenger should move the seat as far back as possible  
and sit upright and well back in the seat.  
D Put children aged 12 and under in the rear seat properly re-  
strained at all times. The SRS AIRBAG deploys with considerable  
speed and force and can injure or even kill children, especially if  
they are 12 years of age and under and are not restrained or im-  
properly restrained. Because children are lighter and weaker than  
2-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Seat, seat belt and SRS AIRBAG  
adults, their risk of being injured from deployment is greater. For  
that reason, we strongly recommend that ALL children (including  
those in child seats and those that have outgrown child restraint  
devices) sit in the REAR seat properly restrained at all times in a  
child restraint device or in a seat belt, whichever is appropriate for  
the child’s age, height and weight.  
Secure ALL types of child restraint devices (including forward fac-  
ing child seat) in the REAR seats at all times.  
NEVER INSTALL A REARWARD FACING CHILD SEAT IN THE  
FRONT SEAT. DOING SO RISKS SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO  
THE CHILD BY PLACING THE CHILD’S HEAD TOO CLOSE TO THE  
SRS AIRBAG.  
According to accident statistics, children are safer when properly  
restrained in the rear seating positions than in the front seating  
positions. For instructions and precautions concerning child re-  
straint systems, see the Child Restraint System section in this  
chapter.  
Adjust the seatback to  
upright position. Sit well  
back and upright.  
Adjust the seatback to  
upright position. Sit  
well back and upright.  
Move the seat  
as far back as  
possible.  
Move the seat as far from the  
steering wheel as practical.  
HS0233  
HS0234  
– CONTINUED –  
2-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Put children in the rear seat properly  
restrained at all times.  
Do not recline the seatback while  
vehicle is moving.  
HG0356  
J Fore and aft adjustment  
OM-H0031  
OM-H0032  
Pull the lever upward and slide the seat to the desired position. Then re-  
lease the lever and move the seat back and forth to make sure that it is  
securely locked into place.  
J Reclining the seatback  
Pull the reclining lever up and adjust the seatback to the desired posi-  
tion. Then release the lever and make sure the seatback is securely  
locked into place.  
2-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Seat, seat belt and SRS AIRBAG  
J Head restraint adjustment  
To raise the head restraint, pull it up. To lower it, push the head restraint  
down while depressing the release button on the top of the seatback.  
H2735  
The best position for the head restraint is just above or level with the top  
of the ears.  
J Rear seat access (Coupe)  
CAUTION  
D Never operate the reclining pedal with your fingers or with  
bare feet. Doing so could result in injury to your fingers or toes.  
D Never allow children to operate the reclining pedal or lever.  
Their fingers or feet could be caught in the reclining mechanism,  
which may result in injury.  
– CONTINUED –  
2-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
For access to the rear seat, pull up the reclining lever at the right side of  
the passenger’s seat cushion. The seat back will recline forward fully, al-  
lowing you to access to the rear seat.  
For egress from the rear seat, depress the reclining pedal at the back of  
the passenger’s seat cushion. The seat back will recline forward fully, al-  
lowing you room to exit.  
Raise the seat back until it locks after access to or egress from the rear  
seat and make sure that the seat back is locked in position by moving  
the top of it fore and aft.  
Reclining lever  
Reclining pedal  
OM-H0425  
Rear seats  
WARNING  
D Seat belts provide maximum restraint when the occupant sits  
well back and upright in the seat. Do not put cushions or any other  
materials between occupants and seatbacks or seat cushions. If  
you do so, the risk of sliding under the lap belt and of the lap belt  
sliding up over the abdomen will increase, and both can result in  
serious internal injury or death.  
D Never allow passengers to ride on the folded rear seatback, in  
the cargo area. Doing so may result in serious injury.  
2-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Seat, seat belt and SRS AIRBAG  
D Never stack luggage or other cargo higher than the top of the  
seatback because it could tumble forward and injure passengers  
in the event of a sudden stop or accident.  
D Secure skis and other lengthy items properly to prevent them  
from shooting forward and causing serious injury during a sud-  
den stop.  
Sit well back and  
uprigh
HG0339  
CAUTION  
Metallic parts of the seat belt can become very hot in a vehicle  
that has been closed up in sunny weather; they could burn an oc-  
cupant. Do not touch such hot parts.  
J Fold down rear seat — Wagon  
WARNING  
After returning the rear seat to its original position, be certain to  
place all of the seat belts and the tab attached to the seat cushion  
above the seat cushion. And make certain that the shoulder belts  
are fully visible.  
– CONTINUED –  
2-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
B Folding down the seatback  
OM-H0037  
HG0276  
Unlock the seatback by pulling the release knob and fold it down.  
B Folding down the seat cushion and seatback  
1. Move the front seat forward.  
2. Store the seat belts in the seat belt pocket to prevent them falling  
below the cushion.  
Buckle  
(center seatbelt)  
Tongue  
(center seatbelt)  
OM-H0041  
3. Raise the seat cushion by pulling up the tab.  
2-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Seat, seat belt and SRS AIRBAG  
0040  
4. Unlock the seatback by pulling the release knob and fold it down.  
Confirm that the pin located at the bottom of the seat cushion is in-  
serted into the slot at the top of the seatback.  
OM-H0042  
To return the rear seat to its original position, raise the seatback and seat  
cushion until it locks into place and make sure that they are securely  
locked.  
Make sure that the rear seat belts are not under the seat cushion or seat-  
back.  
2-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3-point type seat belts  
(Combination lap/shoulder belts)  
WARNING  
D Never use a belt that is twisted or reversed. In an accident, this  
can increase the risk or severity of injury.  
D Never place the shoulder belt under the arm or behind the  
back. If an accident occurs, this can increase the risk or severity  
of injury.  
D Keep the lap belt as low as possible on your hips. In a colli-  
sion, this spreads the force of the lap belt over stronger hip  
bones instead of across the weaker abdomen.  
D Seat belts provide maximum restraint when the occupant sits  
well back and upright in the seat. To reduce the risk of sliding un-  
der the seat belt in a collision, the front seatbacks should be al-  
ways used in the upright position while the vehicle is running. If  
the front seatbacks are not used in the upright position in a colli-  
sion, the risk of sliding under the lap belt and sliding up of the lap  
belt over the abdomen will increase, and both can result in seri-  
ous internal injury or death.  
D Do not put cushions or any other materials between occupants  
and seatbacks or seat cushions. If you do so, the risk of sliding  
under the lap belt and of the lap belt sliding up over the abdomen  
will increase, and both can result in serious internal injury or  
death.  
D Put children aged 12 and under in the rear seat properly re-  
strained at all times. The SRS AIRBAG deploys with considerable  
speed and force and can injure or even kill children, especially if  
they are 12 years of age and under and are not restrained or im-  
properly restrained. Because children are lighter and weaker than  
adults, their risk of being injured from deployment is greater. For  
that reason, we strongly recommend that ALL children (including  
those in child seats and those that have outgrown child restraint  
devices) sit in the REAR seat properly restrained at all times in a  
child restraint device or in a seat belt, whichever is appropriate  
2-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Seat, seat belt and SRS AIRBAG  
for the child’s age, height and weight.  
Secure ALL types of child restraint devices (including forward  
facing child seats) in the REAR seats at all times.  
NEVER INSTALL A REARWARD FACING CHILD SEAT IN THE  
FRONT SEAT. DOING SO RISKS SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO  
THE CHILD BY PLACING THE CHILD’S HEAD TOO CLOSE TO  
THE SRS AIRBAG.  
According to accident statistics, children are safer when properly  
restrained in the rear seating positions than in the front seating  
positions. For instructions and precautions concerning the child  
restraint system, see the Child Restraint System section in this  
chapter.  
Always wear the seat  
belts correctly.  
Never place the shoulder belt under the arm or  
behind the back.  
Adjust the seat-  
back to upright  
position. Sit well  
HS0230  
1  
back and upright.  
CAUTION  
Metallic parts of the seat belt can become very hot in a vehicle  
that has been closed up in sunny weather; they could burn an oc-  
cupant. Do not touch such hot parts.  
– CONTINUED –  
2-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
J Seat belt warning light and chime  
HG0340  
Your vehicle is equipped with a seat belt warning device at the driver’s  
seat.  
This device causes the seat belt warning light on the instrument panel to  
light up for about six seconds when the ignition switch is turned to “ON”  
to remind the driver to wear the seat belt. If the driver’s seat belt is not  
fastened, a warning chime sounds at the same time.  
J Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) function  
3-point type seat belts have an emergency locking retractor. This allows  
normal body movement but the retractor locks automatically during a  
sudden stop, impact or if you pull the belt very quickly out of the retrac-  
tor.  
J Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) function  
When securing a child restraint system on the front passenger’s seat and  
on either rear seat, the three-point type seat belt must be changed over  
to the Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) mode.  
When the child restraint system is removed, make sure that the retractor  
operates as an Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR).  
For instruction on how to convert the retractor to the ALR mode and re-  
store it to the ELR mode, see the Child Restraint System section in this  
chapter.  
2-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Seat, seat belt and SRS AIRBAG  
J Fastening the seat belt  
CAUTION  
Metallic parts of the seat belt can become very hot in a vehicle  
that has been closed up in sunny weather; they could burn an oc-  
cupant. Do not touch such hot parts.  
Take up slack  
Too high  
Keep as low  
on hip bone  
as possible  
OM-H0044  
1. Adjust the seat position:  
Driver’s seat: Move the seat back as far from the steering wheel as  
practical while still maintaining full vehicle control and adjust the seat-  
back to the upright position.  
Front passenger’s seat: Move the seat as far back as possible and ad-  
just the seatback to the upright position.  
2. Sit well back in the seat.  
3. Pick up the tongue plate and pull the belt out slowly. Do not let it get  
twisted. If the belt stops before reaching the buckle, return the belt  
slightly and pull it out more slowly. If the belt still cannot be unlocked, let  
the belt retract slightly after giving a strong pull on it, then pull it out  
slowly again.  
4. Insert the tongue plate into the buckle until you hear a click.  
For the driver’s side seat belt, a seat belt warning device is provided; if  
the driver is not wearing the seat belt with the ignition in the “ON” posi-  
tion, the warning light on the instrument panel comes on and a warning  
chime also sounds to remind the driver to wear the seat belt.  
– CONTINUED –  
2-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Refer to Warning and Indicator Lights section (chapter 3) for more  
details.  
5. To make the lap part tight, pull up on the shoulder belt. And place the  
lap belt as low as possible on your hips, not on your waist.  
J Unfastening the belt  
Push  
Push  
HB0303  
Push the button on the buckle.  
Before closing the door, make sure that the belts are retracted properly  
to avoid catching the belt webbing in the door.  
J Adjusting the shoulder belt anchor height (Sedan and Wagon)  
WARNING  
When wearing the front seat belts, make sure the shoulder por-  
tion of the webbing does not pass over your neck. If it does, ad-  
just the seat belt anchor to a lower position. Placing the shoulder  
belt over the neck may result in neck injury during sudden brak-  
ing or in a collision.  
2-14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Seat, seat belt and SRS AIRBAG  
OM-H0046  
The shoulder belt anchor height should be adjusted to the position best  
for you. To adjust the anchor height, pull the release knob and move the  
anchor to the desired position so that the shoulder belt passes over the  
middle of the shoulder without touching the neck.  
J Seat belt guide (Coupe)  
WARNING  
The seat belt guide must be in its fully raised position when the  
seat belt is worn.  
Otherwise, the seat belt will be less effective in prevailing injury  
in an accident.  
Before fastening the seat belt, raise the belt guide until it stops so that  
the seat belt can be easily handled. For easy access to or egress from  
the rear seat, lower the guide to the storing position.  
– CONTINUED –  
2-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Wear front seat  
belt with seat  
belt guide  
Seat belt  
guide  
Seat belt guide  
fully raised up.  
Fully  
raised up  
position  
Starting  
position  
OM-H0426  
HG0042  
2-point type seat belt (lap only belt)  
WARNING  
D Seat belts provide maximum restraint when the occupant sits  
well back and upright in the seat. Do not put cushions or any  
other materials between occupants and seatbacks or seat cush-  
ions. If you do so, the risk of sliding under the lap belt and of the  
lap belt sliding up over the abdomen will increase, and both can  
result in serious internal injury or death.  
D Never use a belt that is twisted or reversed. In an accident, this  
can increase the risk or severity of injury.  
D Keep the lap belt as low as possible on your hips. In a colli-  
sion, this spreads the force of the lap belt over stronger hip  
bones instead of across the weaker abdomen.  
2-16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Seat, seat belt and SRS AIRBAG  
Always wear the seat  
belt correctly.  
Sit well back a
HG0358  
CAUTION  
Metallic parts of the seat belt can become very hot in a vehicle  
that has been closed up in sunny weather; they could burn an oc-  
cupant. Do not touch such hot parts.  
The 2-point type seat belt has a manual adjustment device.  
J Fastening the seat belt  
Too high  
Keep as low on hip  
bone as possible.  
49  
1. Sit well back in the seat and pick up the tongue plate marked “CEN-  
TER”. Be careful not to twist the belt.  
2. Insert the tongue plate into the buckle marked “CENTER” until you  
hear a click. The tongue plate marked “CENTER” can be fastened only  
– CONTINUED –  
2-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
into the buckle marked “CENTER”.  
If the belt is not long enough for you, hold the tongue plate at a right  
angle to the belt and pull the belt to extend.  
3. To make the belt tight, pull up on the belt. And place the lap belt as  
low as possible on your hips, not on your waist.  
J Unfastening the belt  
Push  
OM-H0050  
Push the button on the buckle.  
When the seat belt is not in use, buckle the belt to prevent it from being  
caught in the door.  
NOTE  
When folding down the rear seat of the wagon, store the seat belts in the  
seat belt pocket to prevent them falling below the cushion.  
Saet belt pocket  
Buckle  
(center seatbelt)  
Tongue  
(center seatbelt)  
OM-H0041  
2-18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Seat, seat belt and SRS AIRBAG  
Seat belt safety tips  
WARNING  
D All persons in the vehicle should fasten their seat belts BE-  
FORE the vehicle starts to move. Otherwise, the possibility of se-  
rious injury becomes greater in the event of a sudden stop or ac-  
cident.  
D All belts should fit snugly in order to provide full restraint.  
Loose fitting belts are not as effective in preventing or reducing  
injury.  
D Each seat belt is designed to support only one person. Never  
use a single belt for two or more persons — even children. Other-  
wise, in an accident, serious injury or death could result.  
D Replace all seat belt assemblies including retractors and at-  
taching hardware worn by occupants of a vehicle that has been in  
a serious accident. The entire assembly should be replaced even  
if damage is not obvious.  
J Infants or small children  
Use a child restraint system that is suitable for your vehicle. See informa-  
tion on “Child restraint system” in this chapter.  
J Children  
If a child is too big for a child restraint system, the child should sit in the  
rear seat and be restrained using the seat belts. According to accident  
statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seating  
positions than in the front seating positions. Never allow a child to stand  
up or kneel on the seat.  
If the shoulder portion of the belt crosses the face or neck, move the  
child closer to the center of vehicle to help provide a good shoulder belt  
fit. If the shoulder portion of the belt can not be properly positioned, a  
child restraint system should be used. If that is not possible, the child  
should sit in the center rear seat and use the 2-point type seat belt. Care  
must be taken to securely place the lap belt as low as possible on the  
– CONTINUED –  
2-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
hips and not on the child’s waist.  
J Expectant mothers  
Expectant mothers also need to use the seat belts. They should consult  
their doctor for specific recommendations. The lap belt should be worn  
securely and as low as possible over the hips, not over the waist.  
J Maintenance  
CAUTION  
D Keep the belts free of polishes, oils, chemicals and particularly  
battery acid.  
D Never attempt to make modifications or changes that will pre-  
vent the seat belt from operating properly.  
To clean the seat belts, use a mild soap and lukewarm water. Never  
bleach or dye the belts because this could seriously affect their strength.  
Inspect the seat belts and attachments including the webbing and all  
hardware periodically for cracks, cuts, gashes, tears, damage, loose  
bolts or worn areas. Replace the seat belts even if only minor damage is  
found.  
2-20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Seat, seat belt and SRS AIRBAG  
Child restraint systems  
WARNING  
D Never let a passenger hold a child on his or her lap while the  
vehicle is moving. The passenger cannot protect the child from  
injury in a collision, because the child will be caught between the  
passenger and objects inside the vehicle. Additionally, holding a  
child in your lap or arms in the front seat exposes that child to  
another serious danger. Since the SRS AIRBAG deploys with  
considerable speed and force, the child could be injured or even  
killed.  
D Put children aged 12 and under in the rear seat properly re-  
strained at all times. The SRS AIRBAG deploys with considerable  
speed and force and can injure or even kill children, especially if  
they are 12 years of age and under and are not restrained or im-  
properly restrained. Because children are lighter and weaker than  
adults, their risk of being injured from deployment is greater. For  
that reason, be sure to secure ALL types of child restraint  
devices (including forward facing child seats) in the REAR seats  
at all times. You should choose a restraint device which is  
appropriate for the child’s age, height and weight. According to  
accident statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in  
the rear seating positions than in the front seating positions.  
D SINCE YOUR VEHICLE IS EQUIPPED WITH A PASSENGER’S  
SRS AIRBAG, DO NOT INSTALL A REARWARD FACING CHILD  
SEAT IN THE FRONT PASSENGER’S SEAT. DOING SO RISKS SE-  
RIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO THE CHILD BY PLACING THE  
CHILD’S HEAD TOO CLOSE TO THE SRS AIRBAG.  
D Children should be properly restrained in the rear seat at all  
times. Never allow a child to stand up, or to kneel on the front  
passenger’s seat. The SRS AIRBAG deploys with considerable  
force and can injure or even kill the child.  
– CONTINUED –  
2-21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Secure child restraint devices in the  
REAR seats at all times.  
Never install rearward facing child  
seat in the front passenger’s seat.  
OM-H0051  
042  
Never hold a child on your lap or in  
your arms in the front passenger’s  
Never allow a child to stand up, or to  
kneel on the front passenger’s seat  
or any other seat.  
29  
WARNING  
D Child restraint systems and seat belts can become hot in a ve-  
hicle that has been closed up in sunny weather; they could burn  
a small child. Check the child restraint system before you place a  
child in it.  
D Do not leave an unsecured child restraint system in your vehi-  
cle. Unsecured child restraint systems can be thrown around in-  
side of the vehicle in a sudden stop, turn or accident; it can strike  
and injure vehicle occupants as well as result in serious injuries  
or death to the child.  
Infants and small children should always be placed in an infant or child  
restraint system in the rear seat while riding in the vehicle. You should  
use an infant or child restraint system that meets Federal Motor Vehicle  
Safety Standard or Canada Motor Vehicle Safety Standard and is ap-  
2-22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Seat, seat belt and SRS AIRBAG  
propriate for the child’s age and size. All child restraint systems are de-  
signed to be secured in the vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap portion  
of a lap/shoulder belt.  
Children could be endangered in an accident if their child restraints are  
not properly secured in the vehicle. When installing the child restraint  
system, carefully follow the manufacturer’s instructions.  
According to accident statistics, children are safer when properly re-  
strained in the rear seating positions than in the front seating positions.  
These statistics also indicate that the safest position for a child restraint  
system is the center of the rear seat.  
All U.S. states and Canadian provinces require that infants and small  
children be restrained in an approved child restraint system at all times  
while the vehicle is moving.  
J Installing child restraint systems in the 2-point type seat belt  
position (Rear center seating position)  
OM-H0051  
1. Set the child restraint system in the center seating position.  
2. Fasten the 2-point type seat belt to the child restraint system following  
the instructions provided by its manufacturer.  
3. Tighten the seat belt.  
4. Before having a child sit in the child restraint system, move it back  
and forth to check if it is firmly secured. Sometimes a child restraint can  
be more firmly srcured by pushing it down into the seat cushion and then  
– CONTINUED –  
2-23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
tightening the seatbelt.  
If the child restraint system requires a top strap, latch the hook onto the  
top strap anchor and tighten the top strap.  
J Installing child restraint systems in the 3-point type seat belt  
position  
NOTE  
When the child restraint system is no longer in use, remove it and restore  
the ELR function of the retractor. That function is restored by allowing the  
seat belt to retract fully.  
HG0364  
1. Set the child restraint system in the seating position.  
2. Fasten the lap and shoulder belts to the child restraint system follow-  
ing the instructions provided by its manufacturer.  
3. Take up the slack in the lap belt.  
4. Put the shoulder portion of the belt between the rear seatback and the  
child restraint system.  
5. Pull out the seat belt fully from the retractor to change the retractor  
over from the Emergency Locking Retractor(ELR) to the Automatic Lock-  
ing Retractor (ALR) function. Then, allow the belt to rewind into the re-  
tractor. As the belt is rewinding, clicks will be heard which indicate the  
retractor functions as ALR.  
6. Before having a child sit in the child restraint system, move it back  
and forth to check if it is firmly secured. Sometimes a child restraint can  
be more firmly secured by pushing it down into the seat cushion and  
2-24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Seat, seat belt and SRS AIRBAG  
then tightening the seat belt.  
7. Pull at the shoulder portion of the belt to confirm that it cannot be  
pulled out (ALR properly functioning).  
If the child restraint system requires a top strap, latch the hook onto the top  
strap anchor and tighten the top strap.  
HG0188  
J Top strap anchors  
CAUTION  
Always use a genuine top strap anchor.  
B Installation point  
For right seat  
For center seat  
For left seat  
OM-H0055  
HG0189  
D Sedan and Coupe: Anchor installation points are located under  
the covers on the rear shelf.  
– CONTINUED –  
2-25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
D Wagon: Anchor installation points are located under the covers on  
the rear luggage compartment.  
B Top strap anchor installation (for Canada models)  
All vehicles built for sale in Canada include an anchor kit in the glove  
compartment.  
Cover  
Anchor bolt assembly  
(5/16 in.)  
Anchor plate  
Spacer  
Setting washer  
OM-H0057  
1. Take the anchor kit out and make sure that it is assembled as  
shown in the illustration above.  
Seadn and Coupe  
Top strap hook  
Front of vehicle  
OM-H0262  
2-26  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Seat, seat belt and SRS AIRBAG  
Wagon – for right and left seat  
Top strap hook  
Lid  
Cap  
Anchor assembly  
Cap  
Front of vehicle  
OM-H0263  
Wagon – for center seat  
Top strap hook  
Anchor assembly  
Cover  
Front of vehicle  
Cap  
OM-H0264  
2. Remove the cover of the anchor installation point.  
3. Set the anchor at the desired installation point and tighten the bolt  
until the anchor is firmly secured.  
4. Install the anchor plate cover.  
Please contact your SUBARU dealer about any questions you may  
have regarding the installation of the top strap anchor.  
B Top strap anchor installation (for U.S. models)  
Vehicles built for sale in U.S. do not include an anchor kit in the glove  
compartment. However, the anchor kit and installation instructions are  
available from your SUBARU dealer. You can also follow the installa-  
tion instructions for Canada models.  
2-27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
*SRS AIRBAG  
(Supplemental Restraint System Airbag)  
*SRS: This stands for supplemental restraint system. This name is used  
because the AIRBAG system supplements the vehicle’s seat belts.  
J Vehicle with driver’s and front passenger’s SRS AIRBAGs and  
lap/shoulder restraints  
WARNING  
D To obtain maximum protection in the event of an accident, the  
driver and all passengers in the vehicle should always wear seat  
belts when the vehicle is moving. The SRS AIRBAG does not do  
away with the need to fasten seat belts. In combination with the  
seat belts, it offers the best combined protection in case of a seri-  
ous accident.  
Not wearing a seat belt increases the chance of severe injury or  
death in a crash even when the car has the SRS AIRBAG.  
For instructions and precautions concerning the seat belt sys-  
tem, see the sections 3-point Type Seat Belts and 2-point Type  
Seat Belts in this chapter.  
D Do not sit or lean unnecessarily close to the SRS AIRBAG. The  
SRS AIRBAG deploys with considerable speed – faster than the  
blink of an eye – and force to protect in high speed collisions.  
However, the force of an SRS AIRBAG can injure an occupant  
whose body is too close to SRS AIRBAG. It is also important to  
wear your seat belt to help avoid injuries that can result when the  
SRS AIRBAG contacts an occupant not in proper position such  
as one thrown toward the front of the car during pre-accident  
braking.  
D The SRS AIRBAGs deploy with considerable speed and force.  
Occupants who are out of proper position when the SRS AIRBAG  
deploys could suffer very serious injuries. Because the SRS AIR-  
BAG needs enough space for deployment, the driver should al-  
ways sit upright and well back in the seat as far from the steering  
wheel as practical while still maintaining full vehicle control and  
2-28  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Seat, seat belt and SRS AIRBAG  
the front passenger should move the seat as far back as possible  
and sit upright and well back in the seat.  
D Do not place any objects over the SRS AIRBAG cover or  
between you and the SRS AIRBAG. If the SRS AIRBAG deploys,  
those objects could interfere with its proper operation and could  
be propelled inside the car and cause injury.  
Adjust the seatback to  
upright position. Sit  
well back and upright.  
Adjust the seatback to  
upright position. Sit  
well back and upright.  
Move the seat as far from the  
steering wheel as practical.  
Move the seat as far  
back as possible.  
HS0233  
HS0234  
WARNING  
D Put children aged 12 and under in the rear seat properly re-  
strained at all times. The SRS AIRBAG deploys with considerable  
speed and force and can injure or even kill children, especially if  
they are 12 years of age and under and are not restrained or im-  
properly restrained. Because children are lighter and weaker than  
adults, their risk of being injured from deployment is greater. For  
that reason, we strongly recommend that ALL children (including  
those in child seats and those that have outgrown child restraint  
devices) sit in the REAR seat properly restrained at all times in a  
child restraint device or in a seat belt, whichever is appropriate  
for the child’s age, height and weight.  
Secure ALL types of child restraint devices (including forward  
facing child seats) in the REAR seats at all times.  
According to accident statistics, children are safer when properly  
restrained in the rear seating positions than in the front seating  
positions.  
– CONTINUED –  
2-29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
For instructions and precautions concerning the child restraint  
system, see the Child Restraint System section in this chapter.  
D NEVER INSTALL A REARWARD FACING CHILD SEAT IN THE  
FRONT SEAT. DOING SO RISKS SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO  
THE CHILD BY PLACING THE CHILD’S HEAD TOO CLOSE TO  
THE SRS AIRBAG.  
D Never allow a child to stand up, or to kneel on the front pas-  
senger’s seat, or never hold a child on your lap or in your arms.  
The SRS AIRBAG deploys with considerable force and can injure  
or even kill the child.  
Put children in the REAR seat prop-  
erly restrained at all times.  
Never install rearward facing child  
seat in the front passenger’s seat.  
G0356  
Never allow a child to stand up, or to  
kneel on the front passenger’s seat.  
Never hold a child on your lap or in  
your arms.  
29  
2-30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Seat, seat belt and SRS AIRBAG  
HS0235  
The driver’s side SRS AIRBAG is stored in the center portion of the steer-  
ing wheel. The passenger’s side SRS AIRBAG is stored near the top of  
the dashboard under the cover marked “SRS AIRBAG”.  
The SRS (Supplemental Restraint System) AIRBAG in your vehicle af-  
fords the driver and front seat passenger additional protection during a  
moderate to severe frontal collision. This system is available for the driv-  
er and front seat passenger and is designed to supplement the protec-  
tion provided by the seat belt. In a moderate to severe frontal collision,  
the SRS AIRBAG supplements the seat belt by reducing the impact on  
the driver’s and front passenger’s head and chest.  
The SRS AIRBAG is designed to deploy in the event of an accident in-  
volving a moderate to severe frontal collision. It is basically not designed  
to deploy in lesser frontal impacts because the necessary protection can  
be achieved by the seat belt alone. Also, it is basically not designed to  
deploy in side or rear impacts or in roll-over accidents because SRS  
AIRBAG deployment would not help the occupant in those situations.  
The SRS AIRBAG is designed to function on a one-time-only basis. In the  
event that the SRS AIRBAG is deployed, replacement of the system  
should be performed only by an authorized SUBARU dealer. When the  
components of the SRS AIRBAG are replaced, use only genuine  
SUBARU parts.  
– CONTINUED –  
2-31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
NOTE  
When you sell your vehicle, we urge you to explain to the buyer that  
it is equipped with SRS AIRBAGs by alerting him or her to the appli-  
cable section in this owner’s manual.  
J SRS AIRBAG System operation  
CAUTION  
D When the SRS AIRBAG deploys, some smoke will be released.  
This smoke could cause breathing problems for people with a  
history of asthma or other breathing trouble. If you or your pas-  
sengers have breathing problems after SRS AIRBAG deploys, get  
fresh air promptly.  
D Do not touch the SRS AIRBAG system components around the  
steering wheel and dashboard with bare hands right after deploy-  
ment. Doing so can cause burns because the components can be  
very hot as a result of deployment.  
2-32  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Seat, seat belt and SRS AIRBAG  
SRS AIRBAG module  
(Driver’s side)  
Front sub sensor (RH)  
SRS AIRBAG module  
(Passenger’s side)  
Front sub sensor (LH)  
SRS AIRBAG control module  
(including impact sensors)  
HG0287  
Driver’s side  
Passenger’s side  
SRS AIRBAGs  
deploy as soon as  
a collision occurs.  
After deployment,  
SRS AIRBAGs  
start to deflate im-  
mediately so that  
the driver’s vision is  
not obstructed.  
OM-H0384  
– CONTINUED –  
2-33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The SRS AIRBAG can function only when the ignition switch is in the  
“ON” position.  
If the impact sensors in the airbag control module and the front sub sen-  
sors in both front fenders detect a certain predetermined amount of force  
during a frontal collision, the control module sends signals to the airbag  
modules instructing them to inflate the SRS AIRBAGs. Then both airbag  
modules produce gas, which instantly inflates driver’s and passenger’s  
SRS AIRBAGs. After the deployment, the SRS AIRBAGs immediately  
start to deflate so that the driver’s vision is not obstructed. The time re-  
quired from detecting impact to deflating of the SRS AIRBAGs after de-  
ployment is shorter than the blink of eye.  
Although it is highly unlikely that the SRS AIRBAG would activate in a  
non-accident situation, should it occur, the bag will deflate quickly, not  
obscuring vision and will not interfere with the driver’s ability to maintain  
control of the vehicle.  
When the SRS AIRBAG deploys, a sudden, fairly loud inflation noise will  
be heard and some smoke will be released. These occurrences are a  
normal result of the chemical reaction in the airbag module. This smoke  
does not indicate a fire in the vehicle.  
SRS AIRBAG deployment depends on the level of force experienced in  
the passenger compartment during a collision. That level differs from  
one type of collision to another, and it may have no bearing on the visible  
damage done to the vehicle itself.  
2-34  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Seat, seat belt and SRS AIRBAG  
B Examples of the types of accidents in which the SRS AIRBAG  
is unlikely to deploy.  
There are many types of collisions which might not necessarily require  
SRS AIRBAG deployment. If the vehicle strikes an object, such as a  
telephone pole or sign pole, or if it slides under a truck’s load bed, or  
if it sustains an oblique offset frontal impact, the SRS AIRBAG may not  
deploy depending on the level of accident forces involved.  
The vehicle strikes a tele-  
phone pole or similar ob-  
ject.  
The vehicle slides under a  
truck’s load bed.  
The vehicle sustains an  
oblique offset frontal im-  
pact.  
HG0288  
HG0289  
HG0290  
B Examples of the types of accidents in which the SRS AIRBAG  
will basically not deploy.  
The SRS AIRBAG is basically not designed to deploy if the vehicle is  
struck from the side or from behind, or if it rolls onto its side or roof, or  
if it is involved in a low-speed frontal collision.  
The vehicle is struck from  
behind.  
The vehicle is struck from  
the side.  
The vehicle rolls onto its  
side or roof.  
HG0291  
HG0292  
HG0293  
– CONTINUED –  
2-35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
J System monitors  
AIRBAG warning light  
HG0341  
A diagnostic system continually monitors the readiness of the SRS AIR-  
BAG while the vehicle is being driven. The SRS AIRBAG warning light  
will show normal system operation by lighting for about 6 seconds when  
the ignition key is turned to the “ON” position.  
The following components are monitored by the indicator:  
D Right front sub sensor  
D Left front sub sensor  
D AIRBAG control module (including impact sensors)  
D AIRBAG module (driver’s side)  
D AIRBAG module (passenger’s side)  
D All related wiring  
In the event of a malfunction indicated by any of following, the vehicle  
should be taken promptly to your nearest SUBARU dealer to have the  
system checked. Unless checked and repaired, the SRS AIRBAG will not  
function reliably:  
D Flashing or flickering of the warning light.  
D No illumination of the warning light when the ignition switch is  
turned to the “ON” position.  
D Continuous illumination of the warning light.  
D Illumination of the warning light while driving.  
2-36  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Seat, seat belt and SRS AIRBAG  
J System servicing  
WARNING  
D When discarding an airbag module or scrapping the entire car  
damaged by a collision, consult your SUBARU dealer.  
D The SRS AIRBAG system has no user-serviceable parts. Tam-  
pering with or disconnecting the system’s wiring could result in  
accidental inflation of the airbag or could make the system inop-  
erative, which may result in serious injury. The wiring harnesses  
of the SRS AIRBAG system are covered with yellow insulation  
and the connectors of the system are yellow for easy identifica-  
tion. Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to  
the SRS AIRBAG system. For required servicing of the SRS AIR-  
BAG, see your nearest SUBARU dealer.  
CAUTION  
The front sub sensors are located in both front fenders and the  
SRS AIRBAG control module including the impact sensors is lo-  
cated under the center console. If you need service or repair in  
those areas or near the steering wheel and column, we recom-  
mend that you have an authorized SUBARU dealer perform the  
work.  
To ensure its long-term reliability, the SRS AIRBAG must be inspected by  
a SUBARU dealer ten years after the date of manufacture, which is  
shown on the certification plate attached to the driver’s door jamb.  
NOTE  
D If the front part of the vehicle was involved in an accident not of the  
extent to cause the SRS AIRBAGs to deploy, contact your SUBARU deal-  
er as soon as possible.  
D If the pad section of the steering wheel or front passenger’s SRS AIR-  
BAG cover is scratched, cracked, or otherwise damaged, contact your  
SUBARU dealer as soon as possible.  
– CONTINUED –  
2-37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
J Precautions against vehicle modification  
WARNING  
D Do not put any objects over the steering wheel pad and dash-  
board. If the SRS AIRBAG deploys, those objects could interfere  
with its proper operation and could be propelled inside the vehi-  
cle and cause injury.  
D Do not attach accessories to the windshield, or fit an extra-  
wide mirror over the rear view mirror. If the SRS AIRBAG deploys,  
those objects could become projectiles that could seriously in-  
jure vehicle occupants.  
D To avoid accidental actuation of the system or rendering the  
system inoperative, which may result in serious injury, no modifi-  
cations should be made to any components or wiring of the SRS  
AIRBAG.  
This includes the installation of “custom” steering wheels or  
additional trim material, or badges over the pad section of the  
steering wheel. Installation of additional electrical/electronic  
equipment such as a mobile two way radio on or near SRS AIR-  
BAG components and/or wiring is not advisable.  
Do not put any objects over the  
steering wheel pad and dashboard  
Do not attach accessories to the  
windshield, or fit an extra-wide mir-  
ror over the rear view mirror.  
S0244  
S0245  
2-38  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Seat, seat belt and SRS AIRBAG  
CAUTION  
Do not perform any of the following modifications. Such modifi-  
cations can interfere with proper operation of the SRS AIRBAG  
system.  
D Attachment of any equipment (brush bar, winches, snow plow,  
skid plate, etc.) other than SUBARU genuine accessory parts to  
the front end.  
D Modification of the suspension system and front end struc-  
ture.  
D Installation of a tire of different size and construction from the  
original tire’s listed on the tire placard attached to the driver’s  
door jamb.  
Always consult your SUBARU dealer if you want to install any accessory  
parts to your vehicle.  
2-39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments and controls  
Instrument panel overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Combination meter overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
3-2  
3-3  
3-5  
3-5  
3-5  
3-5  
3-6  
3-6  
3-7  
3-8  
3-8  
3-8  
3-8  
3-9  
3-9  
3-9  
Gauges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Trip meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Tachometer (if equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Temperature gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Warning and indicator lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Checking bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Seat belt warning light and chime . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
SRS AIRBAG warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Charge warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Oil pressure warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Brake system warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
3
CHECK ENGINE warning light/Malfunction indicator lamp . . . . . . 3-10  
ABS warning light (for vehicles with ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11  
AT OIL TEMPerature warning light (for AT vehicles) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12  
Door open warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13  
Front-wheel drive warning light (for AWD AT vehicles) . . . . . . . . . . 3-13  
Turn signal indicator lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
High beam indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Low fuel warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
3-13  
3-13  
3-13  
Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14  
Setting the clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
3-14  
Hazard warning flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14  
Light controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15  
Light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Illumination brightness control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Parking light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Fog light switch (if equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
3-15  
3-18  
3-18  
3-19  
Wiper controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20  
Windshield wipers and washer switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
3-21  
Rear window wiper and washer switch (Wagon only) . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22  
Rear window defogger switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24  
Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25  
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25  
Inside mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Outside mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
3-25  
3-26  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instrument panel overview  
HGF000BB  
1 Cruise control main switch  
(page 7-24)  
8 Heater or air conditioner con-  
trol (page 4-3)  
2 Combination meter (page 3-3)  
3 Hazard warning flasher switch  
(page 3-14)  
9 Audio (page 5-1)  
Q Cigarette lighter socket  
(page 6-9)  
4 Rear window defogger switch  
(page 3-24)  
5 Cup holder (page 6-6)  
6 SRS AIRBAG (page 2-28)  
7 Glove compartment (page 6-3)  
W Horn (page 3-25)  
E Tilt steering (page 7-23)  
R Hood lock release (page 1-30)  
T Fog light switch (page 3-19)  
3-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments and controls  
Combination meter overview  
HG30001BB  
1 Fuel gauge (page 3-6)  
2 Clock adjusting knob (page 3-14)  
3 Clock (page 3-14)  
4 SRS AIRBAG warning light  
(page 3-8)  
5 Turn signal indicator light  
(page 3-13)  
6 Speedometer (page 3-5)  
7 High beam indicator light  
(page 3-13)  
8 Tachometer (page 3-6)  
9 Brake system warning lights  
(page 3-9)  
Q Charge warning light (page 3-9)  
W CHECK ENGINE warning light/  
Malfunction indicator lamp  
(page 3-10)  
E Oil pressure warning light  
(page 3-9)  
R Odometer/Tripmeter selection and  
trip meter reset knob (page 3-5)  
T Door opening warning light  
(page 3-13)  
Y Seat belt warning light  
(page 3-8)  
U Odometer/Tripmeter (page 3-5)  
I Temperature gauge (page 3-7)  
O AT oil temperature warning light  
(page 3-12)  
P ABS warning light (page 3-11)  
A Front-wheel drive warning light  
(page 3-13)  
S Low fuel warning light (page 3-13)  
– CONTINUED –  
3-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
J Light controls/Wiper controls  
1
2
3
T
5
4
6
E
R
W
Q
7
8
9
HG0331  
1
2
3
4
5
Parking light switch  
(page 3-18)  
Hazard warning flasher switch  
(page 3-14)  
Rear window defogger switch  
(page 3-24)  
Rear window wiper and  
washer switch (page 3-22)  
Windshield washer  
(page 3-22)  
8
9
Q
Wiper control (page 3-20)  
Light control (page 3-15)  
Illumination brightness control  
(page 3-18)  
Headlight ON/OFF  
(page 3-15)  
Headlight flasher/  
High/Low beam change  
(page 3-16/3-16)  
Turn signal (for lane change)  
(page 3-17)  
Turn signal (page 3-17)  
W
E
R
T
6
7
Mist (page 3-22)  
Windshield wiper (page 3-21)  
3-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments and controls  
Gauges  
HG3001AA  
J Speedometer  
The speedometer shows the vehicle speed.  
J Odometer/Trip meter  
Tripmeter  
Odometer  
HG0296  
This meter displays the odometer and trip meter when the ignition switch  
is in the “ON” position.  
To change the mode indication, briefly push the knob.  
The odometer shows the total distance that the vehicle has been driven.  
The trip meter shows the distance that the vehicle has been driven since  
you last set it to zero.  
To set the trip meter to zero, select the indication of the trip meter by  
– CONTINUED –  
3-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
pushing the knob and keep the knob pushed for more than 2 seconds.  
NOTE  
If the connection between the combination meter and battery is broken  
for any reason such as vehicle maintenance or fuse replacement, the  
data recorded on the trip meter will be lost.  
J Tachometer (if equipped)  
CAUTION  
Do not operate the engine with the pointer of the tachometer in  
the red zone. In this range, fuel injection will be cut by the engine  
control module to protect the engine from overrevving. The en-  
gine will resume running normally after the engine speed is re-  
duced below the red zone.  
The tachometer shows the engine speed in thousands of revolutions per  
minute.  
J Fuel gauge  
The fuel gauge shows approximately the amount of the fuel remaining in  
the tank.  
The gauge does not return to “E” even though the ignition switch is in the  
“ACC” or “LOCK” position.  
The gauge may move slightly during braking, turning or acceleration due  
to fuel movement in the tank.  
3-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments and controls  
J Temperature gauge  
CAUTION  
If the pointer exceeds the normal operating range, safely stop the  
vehicle as soon as possible.  
See “In case of emergency” in this manual.  
Normal  
operating  
range  
HG0297  
The temperature gauge shows engine coolant temperature when the  
ignition switch is in the “ON” position.  
The coolant temperature will vary in accordance with the outside temper-  
ature and driving conditions.  
We recommend that you drive moderately until the pointer of the temper-  
ature gauge reaches near the middle of the range. Engine operation is  
optimum with the engine coolant at this temperature range and high rev-  
ving operation when the engine is not warmed up enough should be  
avoided.  
3-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Warning and indicator lights  
J Checking bulbs  
Several of the warning and indicator lights come on momentarily and  
then go out when the ignition switch is initially turned to the “ON” posi-  
tion. This permits checking the operation of the bulbs.  
Apply the parking brake and turn the ignition switch to the “ON” position.  
The following lights come on:  
Seat belt warning light  
SRS AIRBAG warning light  
Charge warning light  
Oil pressure warning light  
Brake system warning light  
CHECK ENGINE warning light/Malfunction indicator lamp  
ABS warning light (for vehicles with ABS)  
AT OIL TEMPerature warning light (for AT vehicles)  
If any lights fail to come on, it indicates a burned-out bulb or a malfunc-  
tion of the corresponding system.  
Consult your authorized SUBARU dealer for repair.  
J Seat belt warning light and chime  
When the ignition switch is turned to the “ON” position, the seat belt  
warning light will come on and the reminder chime will sound to remind  
driver to fasten the seat belt.  
The seat belt warning light will remain on for about six seconds and turn  
off automatically after six seconds.  
The seat belt reminder chime will turn off by buckling the driver’s side  
seat belt or turn off automatically after six seconds.  
J SRS AIRBAG warning light  
AIRBAG  
When the ignition switch is turned to the “ON” position, the SRS AIRBAG  
warning light will come on for about six seconds and go out. This shows  
the SRS AIRBAG is in normal operation.  
If this light comes on while driving or does not go out after the engine  
3-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments and controls  
starts, it may indicate that the SRS AIRBAG system is not working prop-  
erly. Contact your nearest SUBARU dealer immediately.  
J Charge warning light  
If this light comes on when the engine is running, it may indicate that the  
charging system is not working properly.  
If the light comes on while driving or does not go out after the engine  
starts, stop the engine and check the alternator belt. If the belt is loose,  
broken or if the belt is in good condition but the light remains on, contact  
your nearest SUBARU dealer immediately.  
J Oil pressure warning light  
CAUTION  
Do not operate the engine with the oil pressure warning light on.  
This may cause engine damage.  
If this light comes on when the engine is running, it may indicate that the  
engine oil pressure is low and the lubricating system is not working prop-  
erly.  
If the light comes on while driving or does not go out after the engine  
starts, stop the engine at the first safe opportunity and check the engine  
oil level. If the oil level is low, add oil immediately. If the engine oil is at  
the proper level but the light remains on, contact your nearest SUBARU  
dealer immediately.  
BRAKE (US)  
(Canada)  
J Brake system warning light  
WARNING  
D Driving with the brake system warning light on is dangerous.  
This indicates your brake system may not be working properly. If  
the light remains on, have the brakes inspected by a SUBARU  
dealer immediately.  
D If at all in doubt about whether the brakes are operating prop-  
erly, do not drive the vehicle. Have your vehicle towed to the  
nearest SUBARU dealer for repair.  
– CONTINUED –  
3-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This light has the following two functions:  
B Parking brake warning  
The light comes on with the parking brake applied while the ignition  
switch is in the “ON” position. It goes out when the parking brake is  
fully released.  
B Brake fluid level warning  
This light comes on when the brake fluid level drops to near the “MIN”  
level of the brake fluid reservoir with the ignition switch in the “ON”  
position and with the parking brake fully released.  
If the brake system warning light should come on while driving with  
the parking brake lever fully released, it could be an indication of  
leaking of brake fluid or worn brake pads. In such a case, have your  
vehicle checked by a SUBARU dealer immediately.  
J CHECK ENGINE warning light/  
Malfunction indicator lamp  
CAUTION  
If the CHECK ENGINE light comes on while you are driving, have  
your vehicle checked/repaired by your SUBARU dealer as soon  
as possible. Continued vehicle operation without having the  
emission control system checked and repaired as necessary  
could cause serious damage, which may not be covered by your  
vehicle’s warranty.  
If this light comes on steadily or blinks while the engine is running, it may  
indicate that there is a problem or potential problem somewhere in the  
emission control system.  
B If the light comes on steadily:  
If the light comes on steadily while driving or does not go out after the  
engine starts, an emission control system malfunction has been de-  
tected.  
You should have your vehicle checked by an authorized SUBARU  
dealer immediately.  
3-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments and controls  
NOTE  
This light also comes on when the fuel filler cap is not tightened until it  
clicks. If you have recently refueled your vehicle, the cause of the  
CHECK ENGINE warning light/malfunction indicator lamp coming on  
could be a loose or missing fuel filler cap. Remove the cap and  
retighten it until it clicks. Make sure nothing is interfering with the seal-  
ing of the cap. Tightening the cap will not make the CHECK ENGINE  
warning light turn off immediately. It may take several driving trips. If  
the light does not go out, take your vehicle to your authorized SUB-  
ARU dealer immediately.  
B If the light is blinking:  
If the light is blinking while driving, an engine misfire condition has  
been detected which may damage the emission control system.  
To prevent serious damage to the emission control system, you  
should do the following:  
D Reduce vehicle speed.  
D Avoid hard acceleration.  
D Avoid steep uphill grades.  
D Reduce the amount of cargo, if possible.  
D Stop towing a trailer as soon as possible.  
The CHECK ENGINE warning light may stop blinking and come on  
steadily after several driving trips. You should have your vehicle  
checked by an authorized SUBARU dealer immediately.  
(U.S.)  
(Canada)  
ABS  
J ABS warning light (for vehicles with ABS)  
The ABS warning light comes on when the ignition switch is turned to the  
“ON” position and goes out after about two seconds.  
This is an indication that the ABS system is working properly.  
If the warning light behaves as follows, ABS system may not work prop-  
erly.  
D The warning light does not come on when the ignition switch is turned  
to the “ON” position.  
D The warning light comes on when the ignition switch is turned to the  
“ON” position, but it does not go out even when the vehicle speed  
– CONTINUED –  
3-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
exceeds approximately 8 mph (12 km/h).  
D The warning light comes on during driving.  
When the warning light is on, the ABS function shuts down; however, the  
conventional brake system continues to operate normally. If this occurs,  
have the ABS system repaired at the first available opportunity by your  
SUBARU dealer.  
NOTE  
If the warning light behavior is as shown below, the ABS system may be  
considered normal.  
D The warning light comes on right after the engine is started but goes  
out immediately, remaining off.  
D The warning light remains on after the engine has been started, but it  
goes out when the vehicle speed reaches about 8 mph (12 km/h).  
D The warning light comes on during driving, but it goes out immedi-  
ately and remains off.  
When driving with an insufficient battery voltage such as when the en-  
gine is jump started, the ABS warning light may come on. This is due to  
the low battery voltage and does not indicate a malfunction. When the  
battery becomes fully charged, the light will go out.  
J AT OIL TEMPerature warning light (for AT vehicles)  
This light comes on when the ignition switch is turned to the “ON” posi-  
tion and goes out after about two seconds. If this light comes on when  
the engine is running, it may indicate that the automatic transmission  
fluid temperature is too hot.  
Even if the light comes on while driving, it is unnecessary to stop the ve-  
hicle. But avoid driving up steep grades or driving in stop and go traffic.  
B Automatic transmission control system warning  
If the light flashes after the engine starts, it may indicate that the auto-  
matic transmission control system is not working properly. Contact  
your nearest SUBARU dealer for service immediately.  
3-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments and controls  
J Door open warning lights  
The door open warning light comes on if any door or rear gate (for  
wagon) is not fully closed.  
Always make sure this light is out before you start to drive.  
J Front-wheel drive warning light (for AWD AT vehicles)  
This light comes on when All Wheel Drive is disengaged and the drive  
mechanism is switched to Front Wheel Drive for maintenance or similar  
purposes.  
J Turn signal indicator lights  
These lights show the operation of the turn signal or lane change signal.  
If the indicator lights do not blink or blink rapidly, the turn signal bulb  
may be burned out. Replace the bulb as soon as possible. Refer to Re-  
placing Bulbs section in chapter 10.  
J High beam indicator  
This light shows that the headlights are in the high beam mode.  
This indicator light also comes on when operating headlight flasher.  
J Low fuel warning light  
The low fuel warning light comes on when the tank is nearly empty  
(about 2.3 U.S. gal., 9.0 liters, 1.9 Imp. gal.). It only operates when the  
ignition switch is in the “ON” position.  
NOTE  
This light does not go out unless the tank is replenished up to an internal  
fuel quantity of about 3.6 U.S. gal. (14 liters, 3.0 Imp. gal.).  
3-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Clock  
HG3002AA  
The clock displays the time when the ignition switch is in the “ACC” or  
“ON” positions.  
J Setting the clock  
Each time the “+” button is pressed, the clock gains 1 minute. By hold-  
ing the button depressed, the clock can be put forward continuously.  
Pressing the “–” button puts the clock rearward.  
Hazard warning flasher  
HS0053  
The hazard warning flasher is used to warn other drivers when you have  
to park your vehicle under emergency conditions. The hazard warning  
3-14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments and controls  
flasher works with the ignition switch in any position.  
When you have to park your vehicle under emergency conditions, pull off  
the road safely and park away from the traffic if it is possible.  
To turn on the hazard warning flasher, push the hazard warning button  
on the instrument panel. To turn off the flasher, push the button again.  
NOTE  
When the hazard warning flasher is on, the turn signals do not work.  
Light controls  
J Light switch  
WARNING  
To prevent battery discharge resulting from accidentally leaving  
your lights on when your vehicle is parked, the light switch oper-  
ates only when the ignition switch is in the “ON” position. In any  
other position, the vehicle’s lights will be out.  
If you park vehicle on a roadside at night, use hazard warning  
flasher to alert the other drivers.  
Dimmer  
Headlight flasher  
HS0054  
HS0055  
The light switch operates only when the ignition switch is in the “ON”  
position.  
B Headlights  
To turn on the headlights, turn the knob on the end of the turn signal  
– CONTINUED –  
3-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
lever.  
first position  
Parking lights, instrument panel illumination, tail lights, side marker  
lights and license plate light are on.  
second position  
Headlights, parking lights, instrument panel illumination, tail lights,  
side marker lights and license plate light are on.  
B High/low beam change (dimmer)  
To change from low beam to high beam, push the turn signal lever  
forward. When the headlights are on high beam, the high beam indi-  
cator light “a” on the instrment panel is also on.  
To switch back to low beam, pull the lever back to the detent position.  
B Headlight flasher  
CAUTION  
Do not hold the lever in the flashing position for more than just  
a few seconds.  
To flash the headlights, pull the lever toward you and then release it.  
The high beam will stay on for as long as you hold the lever. The  
headlight flasher works even though the lighting switch is in the “OFF”  
position.  
When the headlights are on high beam, the high beam indicator light  
a” on the instrment panel also comes on.  
B Daytime running light system (for CANADA models)  
WARNING  
The tail lights, parking lights, and side marker lights are not  
turned on by the daytime running light system. The light switch  
must always be turned to the “a” position when it is dark out-  
side.  
3-16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments and controls  
The low beam headlights will automatically come on at reduced  
brightness when the engine has started, under the following condi-  
tions:  
D The parking brake is fully released.  
D The automatic transmission selector lever is set at other than  
the “P” position.  
D The light switch is in the “OFF” position.  
B Turn signals  
Right turn  
Left turn  
HS0056  
To activate the right turn signal, push the turn signal lever up. To acti-  
vate the left turn signal, push the turn signal lever down. When the  
turn is finished, the lever will return automatically. If the lever will not  
return after cornering, return the lever to the neutral position by hand.  
To signal a lane change, push the turn signal lever up or down slightly  
and hold it during lane change. The turn signal indicator lights will  
flash in the direction of the turn or lane change. The lever will return  
automatically to the neutral position when you release it.  
– CONTINUED –  
3-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
J Illumination brightness control  
Brighten  
Darken  
HS0057  
When the lighting switch is in the “p” or “a” position, you can adjust  
brightness of the instrument panel illumination for better visibility.  
To brighten, turn the control dial counterclockwise.  
To darken, turn the control dial clockwise.  
J Parking light switch  
HS0058  
The parking light switch operates regardless of the ignition switch posi-  
tion.  
By pushing the rear end of this switch, following lights will come on.  
– parking lights  
– front and rear side marker lights  
– tail lights  
3-18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments and controls  
– license plate lights  
To turn off, push the front end of the parking light switch.  
Avoid leaving these lights on for a long time because that will run down  
the battery.  
J Fog light switch (if equipped)  
The fog lights operate only when the headlights are on low beam.  
Push the switch to turn the fog lights on. To turn them off, push the switch  
again.  
HG3000BB  
3-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Wiper controls  
WARNING  
In freezing weather, do not use the windshield washer until the  
windshield is sufficiently warmed by the defroster.  
Otherwise the washer fluid can freeze on the windshield, blocking  
your view.  
CAUTION  
D Do not operate the washer continuously for more than ten se-  
conds, or when the washer fluid tank is empty. This may cause  
overheating of the washer motor. Check the washer fluid level fre-  
quently, such as at fuel stops.  
D Do not operate the wipers when the windshield or rear window  
is dry. This may scratch the glass, damage the wiper blades and  
cause the wiper motor to burn out. Before operating the wiper on  
a dry windshield or rear window, always use the windshield  
washer.  
D In freezing weather, be sure the wiper blades are not frozen to  
the windshield or rear window before operating the wipers.  
D Do not operate the wipers if the wiper blades are frozen to the  
windshield or rear window. If the wiper would be operated with  
the wiper blades frozen to the windshield or rear window, the  
wiper blades could be worn or damaged prematurely, resulting in  
streaking or incomplete wiping. Be sure to use the defroster or  
rear window defogger, if the wiper blades are frozen to the glass.  
D Do not clean the wiper blades with gasoline or a solvent, such  
as paint thinner or benzene. This will cause deterioration of the  
wiper blades.  
NOTE  
D The wiper operates only when the ignition switch is in the “ON” or  
“ACC” position.  
3-20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments and controls  
D Clean your wiper blades and windshield periodically with a wind-  
shield washer solution to prevent streaking, and to remove accumula-  
tions of road salt or road film. Keep the windshield washer button  
depressed at least for 1 second so that washer solution will be sprinkled  
all over the windshield or rear window.  
D Grease, wax, insects or other material on the windshield or the wiper  
blade results in jerky wiper operation and streaking on the glass. If you  
cannot remove those streaks after operating the windshield washer or if  
the wiper operation is jerky, clean the outer surface of the windshield (or  
rear window) and the wiper blades using a sponge or soft cloth with a  
neutral detergent or mild-abrasive cleaner. After cleaning, rinse the wind-  
shield and wiper blades with clean water. The windshield is clearn if  
beads do not form when you rinse the windshield with water.  
D If you cannot eliminate streaking even after following this method,  
replace the wiper blades with new ones. Refer to the Wiper Blade  
Replacement section (chapter 10) for replacement instructions.  
J Windshield wipers and washer switch  
B Windshield wipers  
OFF  
INT  
Mist  
O  
HI  
HS0060  
To turn the wipers on, push the wiper control lever down.  
: Intermittent  
LO : Low speed  
HI : High speed  
– CONTINUED –  
3-21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
To turn the wipers off, return the lever to the “OFF” position.  
B Mist (for a single wipe)  
For a single wipe of the wipers, pull the lever toward you. The wipers  
operate until you release the lever.  
B Washer  
HS0061  
To wash the windshield, push the washer button at the end of the wip-  
er control lever. The washer fluid sprays until you release the washer  
button. The wipers operate while you push the button.  
J Rear window wiper and washer switch (Wagon only)  
CAUTION  
D In freezing weather, be sure the wiper blade is not frozen to the  
rear window before operating the rear wiper. Attempting to oper-  
ate the wiper while the blade is frozen to the rear window could  
cause the wiper motor to burn out. If the wiper blade is frozen to  
the rear window, turn on the rear window defogger and wait to  
melt the frozen wiper blade from the rear window before operat-  
ing the rear wiper.  
D If the wiper stops during operation because of ice or some oth-  
er obstruction on the rear window, the wiper motor could burn  
out even if the wiper switch is turned off. If this occurs, promptly  
stop the vehicle in a safe place, turn the ignition switch to the  
3-22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments and controls  
“LOCK” position and clean the rear window to allow proper wiper  
operation.  
D To prevent the washer motor from overheating, avoid operat-  
ing the washer switch for more than 10 seconds continuously, or  
when the washer fluid tank is empty. Check washer fluid level fre-  
quently, such as at fuel stops.  
D Use clean water if windshield washer fluid is unavailabale. In  
areas where water freezes in winter, use SUBARU Windshield  
Washer Fluid or the equivalent. (See Windshield Washer Fluid  
section in chapter 10.)  
Also, when driving the vehicle when there are freezing tempera-  
tures, use non-freezing type wiper blades.  
Wiper ON  
& washer  
iper ON  
asher  
HS0062  
To turn the rear wiper on, turn the knob on the end of the wiper control  
lever to the “ON” position.  
To turn the wiper off, return the knob on the end of the lever to the “OFF”  
position.  
B Washer  
To wash the rear window while the rear wiper is operating, turn the  
knob on the end of the wiper control lever counterclockwise to the  
” position. The washer fluid sprays until you release the knob.  
To wash the rear window when the rear wiper is not in use, turn the  
knob on the end of the wiper control lever clockwise to the “  
position. The washer fluid sprays and the wiper operates until you re-  
lease the knob.  
3-23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Rear window defogger switch  
CAUTION  
D Do not use sharp instruments or window cleaner containing  
abrasives to clean the inner surface of the rear window. They may  
damage the conductors printed on the window.  
D To prevent the battery from being discharged, do not operate  
the defogger continuously for any longer than necessary.  
The rear window defogger operates only when the ignition switch is in  
the “ON” position.  
Indicator light  
HS0063  
To turn on the defogger, push the switch. To turn it off, push the switch  
again.  
The indicator light located on the switch lights up while the rear window  
defogger is operating.  
The defogger will automatically shut off after about 15 minutes. If the win-  
dow clears before this time, push the switch to turn it off. It also turns off  
when the ignition switch is turned to the “ACC” or “LOCK” position. If  
defrosting or defogging is desired when you restart your vehicle, you  
have to push the switch to turn it on again.  
3-24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments and controls  
Horn  
OM-H0440  
To sound the horn, push the horn pad.  
Mirrors  
Always check that the inside and outside mirrors are properly adjusted  
before you start driving.  
J Inside mirror  
HG0019  
The inside mirror has a day and night position. Pull the tab at the bottom  
of the mirror toward you for the night position. Push it away for the day  
position. The night position reduces glare from headlights.  
– CONTINUED –  
3-25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
J Outside mirrors  
WARNING  
Objects look smaller in a convex mirror (passenger side) and far-  
ther away than when viewed in a flat mirror. Do not use the con-  
vex mirror to judge the distances of vehicles behind you when  
changing lanes. Use the inside mirror (or glance backwards) to  
determine the actual size and distance of objects that you view in  
the convex mirror.  
OM-H0080  
B Adjusting mirrors  
To adjust the mirrors by hand, push where indicated by the arrows.  
1  
3-26  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments and controls  
B Remote control mirror switch (if equipped)  
The remote control mirrors operate only when the ignition switch is in  
the “ON” or “ACC” position.  
Direction control knob  
Selection switch  
HG0344  
1. Press either end of the selection switch; “L” for the left and “R” for  
the right.  
2. Move the direction control knob to the direction you want to move  
the mirror.  
3. Return the selection switch to the neutral position to prevent  
unintentional operation.  
The mirrors can also be adjusted manually.  
3-27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Climate control  
Ventilator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
4-2  
Heating and air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Air flow control dial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Temperature control dial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Fan speed control lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Air inlet selection lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Air conditioner button (if equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
HEATER OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Defrosting or defogging the windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Heating and defrosting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Bi.level heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
VentilatIon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
AIR CONDITIONER OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Cooling or dehumidifying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Defrosting or defogging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
4-3  
4-3  
4-3  
4-3  
4-4  
4-4  
4-4  
4-4  
4-5  
4-6  
4-6  
4-7  
4-8  
4-8  
4-8  
4
Operating tips for heater and air conditioner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Cleaning ventilator grille . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Efficient cooling after parking in direct sunlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
4-9  
4-9  
4-10  
Lubrication oil circulation in the refrigerant circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10  
Checking air conditioning system before summer season . . . . . . 4-10  
Cooling and dehumidifying in high humidity  
and low temperature weather condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Air conditioner compressor shut-off  
4-10  
when engine is heavily loaded . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Refrigerant for your climate control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
4-10  
4-10  
Air filtration system (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11  
Replacement procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
4-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Ventilator  
Move the thumb-wheel up and down or  
right and left to adjust the air flow direction  
Oepn  
Close  
Oepn  
Close  
Move the thumb-wheel  
up and down or right  
and left to adjust the  
air flow direction  
HS0070  
4-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Climate control  
Heating and air conditioning  
Temperature Air inlet selec-  
Air outlet  
control dial  
tion lever  
control dial  
Fan speed  
control lever  
Air conditioner  
button  
HS0071  
J Air flow control dial  
This dial has following five positions:  
Air flows through the instrument panel outlets.  
Air flows through the instrument panel outlets and the foot out-  
lets.  
Air flows through the foot outlets and some through the wind-  
shield defroster outlets.  
Air flows through the windshield defroster outlets and foot out-  
lets.  
: Air flows through the windshield defroster outlets.  
J Temperature control dial  
This dial regulates the hot air flow from the heater over a range from the  
blue area to red area.  
J Fan speed control lever  
The fan operates only when the ignition switch is turned to the “ON”  
position. The fan speed control lever is used to select four fan speeds.  
– CONTINUED –  
4-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
J Air inlet selection lever  
WARNING  
Continued operaton in the “  
dows. Switch to the “  
dusty condition clears.  
” position may fog up the win-  
” position as soon as the outside  
: Interior air is recirculated inside the passenger comparment.  
: Outside air is drawn into the passenger compartment.  
J Air conditioner button (if equipped)  
The air conditioner operates only when the engine is running.  
Push the air conditioner button while the fan is in operation to turn on the  
air conditioner. The indicator light will come on.  
Push it again to turn off the air conditioner.  
HEATER OPERATION  
J Defrosting or defogging the windshield  
HS0072  
HS0073  
To direct warm air to the windshield and front door windows:  
1. Set the air inlet selection lever to the “  
2. Set the air outlet control dial to the “  
” position.  
” position.  
3. Turn the temperature control dial all the way right.  
4-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Climate control  
4. Set the fan speed control lever to the highest speed.  
Warm air also comes out from the right and left air outlets. To stop warm  
air flow from these outlets, turn the corresponding thumb-wheel to the  
” position.  
J Heating and defrosting  
HS0074  
HS0075  
To direct warm air toward the floor and the windshield:  
1. Set the air inlet selection lever to the “  
2. Set the air outlet control dial to the “  
” position.  
” position.  
3. Set the temperature control dial to the most comfortable level.  
4. Set the fan speed control lever to the desired speed.  
Warm air also comes out from the right and left air outlets. To stop warm  
air flow from these outlets, turn the corresponding thumb-wheel to the  
” position.  
– CONTINUED –  
4-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
J Heating  
HS0076  
HS0077  
To direct warm air toward the floor:  
1. Set the air inlet selection lever to the “  
2 Set the air outlet control dial to the “  
” position  
” position.  
3. Set the temperature control dial to the most comfortable level.  
4. Set the fan speed control lever to the desired speed.  
Warm air also comes out from the right and left air outlets. To stop warm  
air flow from these outlets, turn the corresponding thumb-wheel to the  
” position.  
J Bi.level heating  
HS0078  
HS0079  
This setting allows you to direct air of different temperatures from the  
instrument panel and outlets. The air from the foot outlets is slightly  
4-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Climate control  
warmer than from the instrument panel outlet.  
1. Set the air inlet selection lever to the “  
2. Set the air outlet control dial to the “  
” position.  
” position.  
3. Set the temperature control dial to the desired temperature level.  
4. Set the fan speed control lever to the desired speed.  
Setting the temperature control dial fully turned to the red area or blue  
area decreases the temperature difference between the air from the  
instrument panel outlets and the air from the foot outlets.  
J Ventilation  
WARNING  
Continued operaton in the “  
dows. Switch to the “  
dusty condituion clears.  
” position may fog up the win-  
” position as soon as the outside  
HS0080  
HS0081  
To force outside air through the instrument panel outlets:  
1. Set the air inlet selection lever to the “  
2. Set the air outlet control dial to the “  
” position.  
” position.  
3. Set the temperature control dial all the way left.  
4. Set the fan speed control lever to the desired speed.  
When driving on a dusty road, set the air inlet control lever to the  
” position.  
– CONTINUED –  
4-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AIR CONDITIONER OPERATION  
J Cooling or dehumidifying  
ON position  
HS0082  
HS0081  
For cooling and dehumidification of the passenger compartment, air  
flows through the instrument panel outlets:  
1. Set the air inlet selection lever to the “  
2. Set the air outlet control dial to the “  
3. Push the air conditioner button on.  
” position.  
” position.  
4. Set the temperature control dial to the blue area.  
5. Set the fan speed control lever at the highest speed.  
J Defrosting or defogging  
CAUTION  
The air conditioner compressor will not cycle on automatically  
when set the air outlet control dial to the “  
” position. In  
order to take advantage of the air conditioning system’s ability to  
dehumidify the air in the passenger compartment, it is also nec-  
essary to depress the air conditioner button.  
4-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Climate control  
ON position  
HS0072  
HS0073  
To direct warm air to the windshield and front door windows:  
1. Set the air inlet selection lever to the “  
2. Set the air outlet control dial to the “  
3. Push the air conditioner button on.  
” position.  
” position.  
4. Set the temperature control dial to the red area.  
5. Set the fan speed control lever at the highest speed.  
Operating tips for heater and air conditioner  
J Cleaning ventilator grille  
Ve
HG0083  
Always keep the front ventilator inlet grille free of snow, leaves, or other  
obstructions to ensure efficient heating and defrosting. Since the con-  
denser is located in front of the radiator, this area should be kept clean  
– CONTINUED –  
4-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
because cooling performance is impaired by any accumulation of in-  
sects and leaves on the condenser.  
J Efficient cooling after parking in direct sunlight  
After parking in direct sunlight, drive with the windows open for a few min-  
utes to allow outside air to circulate into the heated interior. This results in  
quicker cooling by the air conditioner. Keep the windows closed during  
the operation of the air conditioner for maximum cooling efficiency.  
J Lubrication oil circulation in the refrigerant circuit  
Operate the air conditioner compressor at a low engine speed (at idle or  
low driving speeds) a few minutes each month during the off-season to  
circulate its oil.  
J Checking air conditioning system before summer season  
Check the air conditioner unit for refrigerant leaks, hose conditions, and  
proper operation each spring. This check is best performed by your  
SUBARU dealer.  
J Cooling and dehumidifying in high humidity and low temperature  
weather condition  
Under certain weather conditions (high relative humidity, low tempera-  
tures, etc.) a small amount of water vapor emission from the air outlets  
may be noticed during cooling or dehumidifying. This condition is normal  
and does not indicate any problem with the air conditioning system.  
J Air conditioner compressor shut-off when engine is heavily  
loaded  
To improve acceleration and gas mileage, this air conditioner compres-  
sor is designed to temporarily shut off during air conditioner operation  
whenever the accelerator is fully depressed. Such as at rapid accelera-  
tion or driving on a steep upgrade.  
J Refrigerant for your climate control system  
Your air conditioner uses ozone friendly refrigerant HFC134a. Therefore,  
the method of adding, changing or checking the refrigerant is different  
4-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Climate control  
from the method for CFC12 (freon). Consult your SUBARU dealer for ser-  
vice. Repairs needed as a result of using the wrong refrigerant are not  
covered under warranty.  
Air filtration system (option)  
If your vehicle’s air conditioning system is equipped with a optional air  
filtration system, replace the filter element according to the replacement  
schedule shown below. This schedule should be followed to maintain the  
filter’s dust collection ability. Under extremely dusty conditions, the filter  
should be replaced more frequently. Since the filter element is viscous  
type, it is unnecessary to clean or wash the element. It is recommended  
that you have your filter checked or replaced by your SUBARU dealer.  
For replacement, use only a genuine SUBARU air filter kit.  
Replacement schedule:  
Every 12 months or 7,500 miles (12,000 km) whichever comes first  
NOTE  
The filter can influence the air conditioning, heating and defroster perfor-  
mance.  
J Replacement procedure  
Cooling unit  
Filter cover  
and rubber  
seal  
HS0253  
HS0254  
1. Remove the filter cover by removing the two (2) screws.  
– CONTINUED –  
4-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2. Remove the old filter.  
Cooling unit  
Rubber seal  
Plastic tab  
New filter  
Fil
HS0255  
HS0256  
3. Insert a new filter with the plastic tab facing forward.  
4. Install rubber seal on the duct opening.  
CAUTION  
Make certain that the rubber seal is evenly seated on the duct  
opening.  
5. Install the filter cover and secure with two (2) screws.  
Center pillar  
Caution label  
Change label  
HS0257  
6. Fill out information on the small label supplied with the filter kit.  
7. Attach small and large labels on the lower part of the center pillar.  
4-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Audio  
Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Manual antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
FM reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
5-2  
5-2  
5-2  
AM/FM stereo radio with cassette player (if equipped) . . . . . .  
RADIO OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Power switch and volume control (ON/VOL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Tone and balance control (TONE/BAL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
FM/AM selection switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Stereo indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Manual tuning (TUNING) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Automatic tuning (SCN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Selecting preset stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
How to preset stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
CASSETTE PLAYER OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Cassette slot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Tape travel indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Program switching buttons (PROG) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Fast-forward button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Rewind button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
5-3  
5-3  
5-4  
5-4  
5-7  
5-7  
5-7  
5-8  
5-8  
5-8  
5-9  
5-9  
5-9  
5-10  
5-10  
5-10  
5-10  
5-10  
5-11  
5-11  
5-11  
5-11  
5-12  
5
Stop and eject button (  
)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Tape program sensor button (TPS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Dolby NR button (BNR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Metal tape button (MTL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
CLOCK FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Display mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Setting the time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Installation of accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Radio  
J Manual antenna  
Before listening to the radio, extend the antenna to its full length for bet-  
ter reception and reproduction quality.  
OM-H0115  
J FM reception  
Although FM is normally static free, reception can be affected by the sur-  
rounding area, atmospheric conditions, station strength and transmitter  
distance. Buildings or other obstructions may cause momentary static,  
flutter or station interference. If reception continues to be unsatisfactory,  
switch to a stronger station.  
5-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Audio  
AM/FM stereo radio with cassette player  
(if equipped)  
The radio will operate only when the ignition switch is in the “ACC” or  
“ON” positions.  
RADIO OPERATION  
Stereo  
indicator  
Press station  
number  
DISP button  
Frequency  
SCAN  
button  
Tone and balance Power switch and  
control button volume control  
Tuning buttons  
Preset buttons  
FM/AM selection  
switch  
HG0084  
– CONTINUED –  
5-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
J Power switch and volume control (ON/VOL)  
When the volume level is set  
at the level 18:  
Volume control  
er ON/OFF  
HS0086  
HS0087  
The same knob is used for both power (on/off) and volume control. The  
radio is turned on and off by pushing the knob and the volume is con-  
trolled by turning the knob.  
The volume control has total of 34 volume levels (V: 0 for minimum, V: 33  
for maximum).  
J Tone and balance control (TONE/BAL)  
The volume control knob normally function as volume control. This knob  
become the controls for Bass, Treble, Fader or Balance when you select  
the relevant tone and balance control mode.  
The “T/B” (Tone and balance) button is used for selecting the following  
control modes:  
– Bass (low note) control  
Treble (high note) control  
– Fader control (Volume balance control between front and rear  
speakers)  
– Balance control (Volume balance control between right and left  
speakers)  
To change control modes: Each pushing the “T/B” button changes  
control modes in the following sequence starting from volume control  
mode. (When the radio is powered on, control mode is in the volume  
control.)  
5-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Audio  
Volume  
(VOL)  
Bass  
(BAS)  
Treble  
(TRE)  
Fader  
(FAD)  
Balance  
(BAL)  
B Bass control  
Bass volume control indication  
When the bass volume level is set at  
the level +6  
HG0085  
HG0086  
Select the Bass control mode by pressing the “T/B” button. In the  
bass control mode, the display shows the indication as shown.  
The bass control has total of 13 volume levels (B: –6 for minimum, 0  
for middle, B: +6 for maximum). Choose desired bass volume level by  
turning the volume control knob. The control function returns to vol-  
ume control mode after about 5 seconds.  
B Treble control  
Treble volume control indication  
When the treble volume level is set  
at the level –6  
HG0087  
HG0088  
– CONTINUED –  
5-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Select the Treble control mode by pressing the “T/B” button. In the  
treble control mode, the display shows the indication as shown.  
The treble control has total of 13 volume levels (TR: –6 for minimum, 0  
for middle, TR: +6 for maximum). Choose desired treble volume level  
by turning the volume control knob. The control function returns to vol-  
ume control mode after about 5 seconds.  
B Fader control  
Fader control indication  
When the fader setting is at the F12  
(front maximum and rear minimum)  
HG0089  
HG0090  
Select the Fader control mode by pressing the “T/B” button. In the  
fader control mode, the display shows the indication as shown.  
The fader control has total of 25 settings (F: 12 for front maximum and  
rear minimum, 0 for neutral, R: 12 for front minimum and rear maxi-  
mum). Choose desired setting by turning the volume control knob.  
The control function returns to volume control mode after about 5 se-  
conds.  
5-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Audio  
B Balance control  
Balance control indication  
When the balance setting is at the L12  
(left side maximum and right side mini-  
mum)  
HG0091  
HG0092  
Select the Balance control mode by pressing the “T/B” button. In the  
balance control mode, the display shows the indication as shown.  
The balance control has total of 25 settings (L: 12 for left side maxi-  
mum and right side minimum, 0 for neutral, R: 12 for left side mini-  
mum and right side maximum). Choose desired setting by turning the  
volume control knob. The control function returns to volume control  
mode after about 5 seconds.  
J FM/AM selection switch  
Use this switch to select either FM or AM reception. The display indi-  
cates which is currently selected.  
J Stereo indicator  
The stereo indicator “ST” will come on when an FM stereo broadcast is  
received.  
J Manual tuning (TUNING)  
Press the tuning button marked “” to increase the tuning frequency and  
press the tuning button marked “” to decrease it.  
Each time the button is pressed, the frequency changes 10 KHz in the  
AM mode and 0.2 MHz in the FM mode.  
Constant pressure on the button causes a continuous change in the fre-  
quency.  
– CONTINUED –  
5-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
J Automatic tuning (SCN)  
Press the “SCN” button to change the radio to the SCAN mode. In this  
mode, the radio scans through the radio band until a station is found.  
The radio will stop at the station for five seconds while displaying the fre-  
quency, after which scanning will continue until the entire band has been  
scanned from the low end to the high end.  
Press the “SCN” button again to cancel the SCAN mode and to stop on  
any displayed frequency.  
J Selecting preset stations  
Presetting a station with a preset button allows you to select that station  
in a single operation. Up to six AM and FM stations each may be preset.  
J How to preset stations  
1. Press the FM/AM selection switch to select either FM or AM reception.  
2. Press the “SCN” button or tune the radio manually until the desired  
station frequency is displayed.  
3. Press one of the preset buttons for at least two seconds to store the  
frequency. The frequency of the station will flash once on the display at  
this time. If the button is pressed for less than two seconds, the preced-  
ing selection will remain in memory.  
When the “SCN” button is pressed for automatic tuning, stations are  
scanned in the direction of low frequencies to high frequencies only.  
Automatic tuning may not function properly if the station reception is  
weakened by distance from the station or proximity to tall buildings and  
hills.  
NOTE  
If the connection between the radio and battery is broken for any reason  
such as vehicle maintenance or radio removal, all stations stored in the  
preset buttons are cleared. If this occurs, it is necessary to reset the pre-  
set buttons.  
5-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Audio  
CASSETTE PLAYER OPERATION  
Fast forward/  
Rewind button  
(Program switching  
buttons)  
Metal tape indicator  
NR indicator  
Cassette slot  
Metal tape button  
NR button  
Tape program sensor button  
HG0093  
NOTE  
D Only use good quality cassettes (cassettes longer than C-90 are not  
recommended).  
D Put cassettes back in their boxes immediately after use to protect  
them from dust and dirt and to prevent the tape from unwinding.  
D Never expose cassettes to heat, direct sunlight or moisture.  
D Clean the tape head (once or twice a month) using a wet-type clean-  
ing cassette.  
J Cassette slot  
Insert a cassette with the exposed tape side facing to the right. After  
inserting, playback starts.  
J Tape travel indicators  
These indicate the direction the cassette tape is moving.  
" indicates that the top side of the cassette is being played back.  
A indicates that the bottom side of the cassette is being played back.  
– CONTINUED –  
5-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
J Program switching buttons (PROG)  
When the program switching buttons (“  
” and “  
” buttons) are  
pressed at the same time during playback, the tape travel indicators will  
switch and the player will begin playing back the opposite side of the  
tape. The same mechanism is automatically activated when the end of  
the tape is reached. This allows the opposite side of the tape to play,  
providing continuous playback.  
J Fast-forward button  
To fast-forward the tape, press the “  
” or “  
” button in the same  
direction to the tape travel indicator. To stop fast-forwarding, lightly press  
the opposite side of the “  
” or “  
” button.  
J Rewind button  
To rewind the tape, press the “  
direction to the tape travel indicator. To stop rewinding, lightly press the  
opposite side of the “ ” or “ ” button.  
” or “  
” button in the opposite  
J Stop and eject button (  
)
When “ ” button is pressed, play back stops and the cassette tape is  
ejected.  
Before the ignition switch turn to the “OFF” position, eject the tape from  
the player. Always make certain that you remove the cassette tape.  
J Tape program sensor button (TPS)  
Press “TPS” button during playback to return to the beginning of the cur-  
rent selection or to skip to the beginning of the next selection. To use this  
function, press the “TPS” button to turn on the “TPS” indicator. If the fast-  
forward button (FF) is then pressed, the player advances the tape to the  
beginning of the next selection and starts playing it. If the rewind button  
(REW) is pressed instead, the player rewinds the tape to the beginning  
of the current selection and starts replaying it. The “TPS” function may  
not operate properly under the following conditions:  
D When the recording level is low.  
D When there are long pauses in the middle of a selection.  
D When the tape contains verbal material such as conversations.  
5-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Audio  
D When the blanks between selections are shorter than five seconds.  
D When there are no blanks between selections (live concerts, etc.).  
J Dolby NR button (BNR)  
Press “BNR” button when playing tapes recorded using the Dolby NR  
system*. The “BNR” indicator will light up and high-frequency noise on  
the tape will be reduced for clearer sound reproduction.  
*
Noise reduction system manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories  
Licensing Corporation. “Dolby” and double-D Symbol are trade marks of Dolby  
Laboratories Licensing Corporation.  
J Metal tape button (MTL)  
Press the “MTL” button when playing a metal or CrO tape.  
2
CLOCK FUNCTION  
The radio has a built-in clock function that displays the time when the  
ignition switch is turned either to “ACC” or “ON”.  
“DISP” buttons  
Tuning buttons  
HG0094  
J Display mode  
You can select either the time display mode or function display mode by  
pressing the “DISP/CLK” button when the ignition switch is either “ACC”  
or “ON” position.  
– CONTINUED –  
5-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
B Time display mode  
When the time display mode is selected, the time display takes prior-  
ity of the function display. The time is shown on the display whenever  
the ignition switch is “ACC” or “ON” position.  
When the radio is switched on or the station is changed during the  
time display mode, the time display is replaced by the frequency dis-  
play. However, after the frequency has been displayed for five se-  
conds, it is replaced by the time display again.  
B Function display mode  
When the function display mode is selected, the time is not shown on  
the display. The display indicates the current function only.  
When the radio is turned off during the function display mode, the  
back-up light on the display goes out.  
J Setting the time  
1. Turn the ignition switch to “ACC” or “ON”.  
2. To adjust hour: Press the “DISP” button and the “TUNING” button  
indicated with “” together to advance the hours in one-hour increments.  
Keeping the buttons pressed advances the hours quickly.  
3. To adjust minute: Press the ”DISP” button and the “TUNING” button  
indicated “” together to advance the minutes in one-minute increments.  
Keeping the buttons pressed advances the minutes quickly.  
NOTE  
If the connection between the radio and battery is broken for any reason  
such as vehicle maintenance or radio removal, the time setting will be  
cleared. If this occurs, it is necessary to reset the time.  
Installation of accessories  
Always consult your SUBARU dealer before installing a citizen band ra-  
dio or other transmitting device in your vehicle. Such devices may cause  
the electronic control system to malfunction if they are incorrectly  
installed or if they are not suited for the vehicle.  
5-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Interior equipment  
Sun visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Vanity mirror (if equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
6-2  
6-2  
Storage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Glove compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Center console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Dashboard storage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Coin tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
6-2  
6-3  
6-3  
6-5  
6-5  
Cup holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Driver’s cup holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Front passenger’s cup holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
6-6  
6-6  
6-7  
Accessory power socket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Electrical power socket located on the lower part of  
6-7  
6-7  
6-7  
the instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Accessory power socket in the luggage compartment  
(if equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
6
Cigarette lighter (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Cigarette lighter (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
6-9  
6-9  
Ashtray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10  
Front ashtray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Rear ashtray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
6-10  
6-11  
Coat hook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12  
Interior light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12  
Spotlight (if equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13  
Gauge pack (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14  
Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
6-14  
Measurement unit selection (Default setting is English units) . . 6-15  
Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Barometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Altimeter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Outside temperature gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
6-16  
6-19  
6-20  
6-22  
Luggage cover (Wagon only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-23  
Using the cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
To remove the cover housing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
To install the cover housing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
6-23  
6-24  
6-24  
Shopping bag hook (Wagon only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-25  
Cargo anchorage eyelets (if equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-25  
Maintenance tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-26  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Sun visors  
HG0021  
HG0022  
To block out glare, swing down the visors. To use the sun visor at a side  
window, swing it down and move it sideways.  
J Vanity mirror (if equipped)  
To use the vanity mirror, swing down the passenger side visor.  
Storage compartment  
CAUTION  
D Always keep the storage compartment closed while driving to  
reduce the risk of injury in the event of sudden stops or an acci-  
dent.  
D Do not store spray cans, containers with flammable or corro-  
sive liquids or any other dangerous items in the storage compart-  
ment.  
6-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Interior equipment  
J Glove compartment  
Unlock  
Lock  
HS0090  
To open the glove compartment, pull the handle. To close it, push the lid  
firmly upward.  
To lock the glove compartment, insert the master key and turn it clock-  
wise. To unlock it, insert the masterkey and turn it counterclockwise.  
J Center console  
HS0279  
To open the lid, pull up the lock release.  
– CONTINUED –  
6-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
B Lid tray  
WARNING  
Objects must not be placed on the lid tray while the vehicle is  
moving. In the event of sudden braking, sudden steering, or a  
collision, objects on the lid tray could be thrown toward the  
vehicle’s occupants and could cause injuries.  
CAUTION  
If drinks are placed on the tray, take care to prevent them from  
spilling. Spilled liquids, if hot, could burn passengers and liquids  
of any kind could damage the vehicle’s interior trim and/or electri-  
cal equipment.  
HG0357  
When the lid of the center console is fully opened, it can be used as a  
tray on which small objects can be placed.  
6-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Interior equipment  
J Dashboard storage compartment  
Push  
HS0094  
To open the dashboard compartment, push the button and pull up on the  
lid. Be sure to close the compartment fully before driving.  
J Coin tray  
HS0096  
To open the coin tray, pull the upper edge of the lid.  
6-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Cup holder  
CAUTION  
D When not in use, always keep the holder stored while driving  
to reduce the risk of injury in the event of a sudden stop or an  
accident.  
D Do not pick up a cup from the cup holder or put a cup in the  
holder while you are driving, as this may distract you and lead to  
an accident.  
D Take care to avoid spills. Beverages, if hot, might burn you or  
your passengers. Spilled beverages may also damage upholstery,  
carpets or audio equipment.  
J Driver’s cup holder  
For small cap  
For large cap  
HS0097  
HS0098  
To use the cup holder, pull it out to the first click stop. If you want to use a  
larger cup, pull it out farther until it stops.  
6-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Interior equipment  
J Front passenger’s cup holder  
HS0305  
HG0306  
The front passenger’s cup holder is built in the center console. To use the  
cup holder, open the lid of the console and open the holder. When not in  
use, fold the holder and close the lid.  
Accessory power socket  
J Electrical power socket located on the lower part of the instru-  
ment panel  
CAUTION  
The electrical power socket located on the lower part of the  
instrument panel is designed to use only a SUBARU genuine cig-  
arette lighter plug. Do not use non-genuine cigarette lighter plugs  
or any “plug-in” type electrical accessories in the socket. Doing  
so may cause a short-circuit and overheating, resulting in a fire.  
Refer to the Cigarette lighter section in this chapter.  
J Accessory power socket in the luggage compartment (if  
equipped)  
CAUTION  
D Do not attempt to use a cigarette lighter in the accessory  
power socket.  
– CONTINUED –  
6-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
D Do not place any foreign objects, especially metal ones such  
as coins or aluminum foil, into the accessory power socket. That  
could cause a short circuit. Always put the cap on the accessory  
power socket when it is not in use.  
D Use only electrical appliances which are designed for 12V DC  
and which consume less than 120W. Overloading the accessory  
power socket can cause a short circuit. Do not use double adapt-  
ers or more than one electrical appliance.  
D If the plug on your electric appliance is either too loose or too  
tight for the accessory power socket, this can result in a poor  
contact or cause the plug to get stuck. Only use plugs that fit  
properly in the accessory power socket.  
D Use of an electric appliance in the accessory power socket for  
a long period of time while the engine is not running can cause  
battery discharge.  
HG6000BA  
The accessory power socket is located on the right side of the luggage  
compartment.  
Electrical power (12V DC) from the battery is on tap at the socket when  
the ignition switch is either in the “ACC” or “ON” position.  
You can use an in-car use electrical appliance by connecting it to the  
socket.  
6-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Interior equipment  
Cigarette lighter (option)  
CAUTION  
The electrical power socket located on the lower part of the  
instrumnet panel is designed to use only a SUBARU genuine cig-  
arette lighter plug. Do not use non-genuine cigarette lighter plugs  
or any “plug-in” type electrical accessories in the socket. Doing  
so may cause a short-circuit and overheating, resulting in a fire.  
HG0299  
The electrical power socket located on the lower part of the instrument  
panel can be used as cigarette lighter socket. A cigarette lighter plug is  
an optional accessory. It is available from your SUBARU dealer.  
If smoking is not desired, always put the cap on the socket to prevent  
any foreign object from entering it.  
J Cigarette lighter (option)  
WARNING  
To avoid being burned, never grasp the lighter by the end with  
the heating element. Doing so could result in injury and could  
also damage the heating element.  
– CONTINUED –  
6-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CAUTION  
Do not hold the lighter pushed in, because it will overheat.  
6  
The cigarette lighter operates only when the ignition switch is in the “ON”  
and “ACC” position.  
To use the cigarette lighter, push in the knob and wait a few moments. It  
will automatically spring up when ready for use.  
Ashtray  
CAUTION  
Do not use ashtrays as waste receptacles or leave a lighted ciga-  
rette in an ashtray. This could cause a fire.  
J Front ashtray  
Fully close the ashtray after using it to help reduce residual smoke.  
6-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Interior equipment  
HS0107  
To open the ashtray, pull the lid out.  
To remove the ashtray for cleaning, open it and pull it out while pushing  
the inner plate down.  
J Rear ashtray  
The ashtray is located at the back of the center console for use by rear  
seat passengers.  
To open the ashtray, pull the upper edge of the lid. Fully close the ash-  
tray after using it to help reduce residual smoke.  
To remove the ashtray for cleaning, open it and pull it out while pushing  
the inner plate down.  
HG0307  
6-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Coat hook  
CAUTION  
Never hang anything on the coat hook that might obstruct the  
driver’s view. And do not hang items on the coat hook that weigh  
2.2 lb (1 kg) or more.  
Interior light  
OM-H0133  
The interior light switch has three positions:  
ON: The light stays on continuously.  
Middle position: The light comes on only when any door is opened.  
OFF: The light stays off.  
When leaving your vehicle, make sure the light is turned off to avoid bat-  
tery discharge.  
6-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Interior equipment  
Spotlight (if equipped)  
OM-H0134  
To turn on the spotlight, push the switch. To turn it off, push the switch  
again.  
When leaving the vehicle, make sure the light is turned off to avoid bat-  
tery discharge.  
6-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Gauge pack (option)  
CAUTION  
Never attempt to adjust any instrument settings while driving. Do-  
ing so may lead to an accident.  
The gauge pack displays following information.  
D Compass direction  
D Barometric pressure  
D Altitude  
D Outside temperature  
J Display  
HS6004BB  
D The display operates when the ignition switch is in the “ACC” or “ON”  
position.  
D The display brightness can be adjusted by pressing the “LIGHT  
CONTROL” button repeatedly to change from dim to bright to off.  
6-14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Interior equipment  
BB  
J Measurement unit selection (Default setting is English units)  
The following procedure is required to select measurement units other  
than English.  
HS6006BB  
1. Turn on the ignition switch to the “ACC” position and the display  
shows the default English measurement units.  
2. Depress the “ADJ” switch for 5 seconds or more and the display will  
show “DEVIATION” together with the “5” and “W”.  
– CONTINUED –  
6-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3. Change the measurement units by pressing the “MODE” switch until  
the proper mode appears.  
4. Press the “ADJ” switch to save your selection.  
NOTE  
D If the setting is not completed in 30 seconds, the display will return to  
the initial mode.  
D When the battery is disconnected, you may have to perform this op-  
eration again to reset to the desired units.  
J Compass  
The compass displays eight (8) directions.  
HS6008BB  
6-16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Interior equipment  
NOTE  
The compass may be affected by interference in the magnetic field. (For  
example natural and artificial causes like tunnels, subways, sub-stations,  
railways, and so forth may affect compass operation.)  
B Compass setting  
HS6006CB  
1. Deviation setting  
HS6009AB  
Depending on your location, the following adjustment is required due  
to the difference between magnetic and geographic North. Refer to  
the map shown above for the setting most appropriate for your loca-  
tion.  
– CONTINUED –  
6-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1) Press the “ADJ” switch for 5 seconds or more.  
2) Press the “YSET” or “B” to obtain the correct setting.  
YSET”: “0” & “W”, “5” & “E”, “10” & “E”, ...  
B”: “10” & “W” “15” & “W”, ...  
3) Press the “ADJ” switch again to save the setting and return the  
system to the original display.  
2. Direction setting  
If the vehicle icon is blinking at any time, the following adjustment is  
required to recalibrate the compass.  
NOTE  
This will happen due to the magnetic field interference as described  
previously.  
HS6010BA  
HS6011BB  
1) Press the “ADJ” switch for the compass setting mode.  
NOTE  
D The compass starts blinking in this mode.  
D This mode can be canceled by pressing the “ADJ” switch again.  
2) Make certain that it is safe to do so and then drive the vehicle in a  
circle until the compass stops blinking. You may have to complete  
more than one circle to perform this calibration.  
NOTE  
D When setting is completed, all blinking disappears.  
D The setting mode is automatically cancelled if the “ADJ” switch is  
pressed in the middle of setting or if the setting is not completed  
within 2 minutes.  
6-18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Interior equipment  
The motion indicator bars move in two patterns according to the  
vehicle speed.  
HS6012BB  
1. 1.8 mile/h (2.8 km/h) of vehicle speed ... 1 second interval bar  
motion.  
2. 12.5 mile/h (20 km/h) or more of vehicle speed ... 0.5 second inter-  
val bar motion.  
NOTE  
D When the vehicle stops, the motion indicator bars will return to their  
original position.  
D When the vehicle is driven in reverse, the motion bars move in the  
same pattern as when driving forward.  
J Barometer  
HS6004CB  
– CONTINUED –  
6-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The display indicates atmospheric pressure in the passenger compart-  
ment.  
Range: 21.26 to 30.86 inHg or 720 to 1045 hpa  
NOTE  
D The reading may change during air-conditioner operation, door win-  
dow operation, driving in a tunnel, and so forth.  
D All barometric readings reported in local weather reports are cor-  
rected to a sea-level reading regardless of altitude. The Gauge Pack dis-  
plays true local air pressure and hence may differ significantly from local  
weather reports (especially at higher altitudes). The barometer is not  
adjustable.  
D Since air pressure changes with altitude, the barometric reading will  
vary when the vehicle is moving up or down an incline. For accurate  
barometric trending, the vehicle should be stationary.  
J Altimeter  
The altimeter has two modes, Standard elevation mode and Relative  
elevation mode.  
HS6013BB  
6-20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Interior equipment  
HS6014BB  
B Standard elevation mode  
The “MODE” switch changes the barometer to the standard elevation  
mode of the altimeter.  
The altimeter indicates the “sea level” elevation.  
Range: –660 to 9200 ft (–200 to 2800 m) at a pitch of 20 ft or 10 m in  
metric measurement units.  
Adjustment: In order to get a precise elevation, manually correct the  
altimeter when the current elevation is known.  
YSET”: 20 ft increase or 10 m increase in metric measurement units.  
B”: 20 ft decrease or 10 m decrease in metric measurement units.  
NOTE  
D The indication may change during air-conditioner operation, door  
window operation, driving in a tunnel, and so forth.  
D Adjustable elevation is ±780 ft (±300 m).  
D To cancel the adjustment and return to the default altimeter read-  
ing, press the “YSET” and “B” switch together for 1 second or more.  
– CONTINUED –  
6-21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
B Relative elevation mode  
HS6015BB  
The altimeter indicates the relative elevation.  
1. The “MODE” switch changes the standard elevation mode to the  
relative elevation mode.  
2. Press the “YSET” switch for the “0” ft” (“0 m”) setting.  
3. The display shows the current elevation relative to the starting  
elevation.  
Range: up to 9800 ft (3000 m) at a pitch of 20 ft (5 m)  
J Outside temperature gauge  
HS6004DB  
The indication shows the outside temperature.  
6-22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Interior equipment  
NOTE  
Indication range: –40°F to 140° F (–40°C to 60°C)  
If the temperature is beyond the range, the maximum number is shown.  
Luggage cover (Wagon only)  
WARNING  
Do not place anything on the extended cover. Putting excessive  
weight on the extended cover can break it and an object on the  
cover could tumble forward in the event of a sudden stop or colli-  
sion. This could cause serious injury.  
CAUTION  
Be careful not to scratch the rear gate stay when using the lug-  
gage cover.  
The scratch on the stay could cause the rear gate to incomplete  
opening.  
The luggage cover is provided for covering the luggage compartment  
and to protect its contents from direct sunlight. This cover is detachable  
to make room for additional cargo.  
J Using the cover  
HG0097  
HG0098  
– CONTINUED –  
6-23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
To extend the cover, pull the end of the cover out of the cover housing,  
then insert its hooks into the catches as shown. To rewind it, unhook it  
from the catches and it will rewind automatically. You should hold on to  
the cover and guide it back into the cover housing while it is rewinding.  
J To remove the cover housing  
Match mark  
HG0099,  
HG0190  
1. Rewind the cover.  
2. Pull either sleeve on the end of the cover housing to shorten its  
length.  
3. Take it off the retainer.  
4. Store the cover housing in the luggage area.  
J To install the cover housing  
1. Pull either sleeve on the end of the cover housing to shorten the cov-  
er’s length.  
2. Insert the projections located on the both ends of the sleeve into the  
recesses of the retainers.  
6-24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Interior equipment  
Shopping bag hook (Wagon only)  
HG0191  
The shopping bag hook is attached to the left side of the luggage  
compartment. You can hook a light shopping bag or something similar  
on it.  
Cargo anchorage eyelets (if equipped)  
CAUTION  
The cargo anchorage eyelets are designed only for securing light  
luggage. Never try to secure the luggage which weights more  
than the load capacity of the anchorage eyelets. The maximum  
load capacity is about 44 lbs (20 kg) per eyelet.  
– CONTINUED –  
6-25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Anchorage eyelets  
HG0192  
The luggage compartment is equipped with four anchorage eyelets for  
securing luggage with a luggage net or ropes.  
When using the anchorage eyelets, raise them up from under the cutouts  
of the luggage compartment mat. When not in use, put the eyelets down  
into the storing recesses.  
Maintenance tools  
OM-H0142  
Your vehicle is equipped with the following maintenance tools:  
Screwdriver  
Wheel nut wrench  
Wheel cover remover (for vehicles equipped with wheel covers)  
6-26  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Starting and operating  
New vehicle break-in driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
The first 1,000 miles (1,600 km) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
7-3  
7-3  
Fuel requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Fuel octane rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Unleaded gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Gasoline for California-certified LEV and TLEV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Gasoline for cleaner air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
7-4  
7-4  
7-4  
7-4  
7-4  
State emission testing (U.S. only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Engine exhaust gas (Carbon monoxide) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Catalytic converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Fuel economy hints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
7-6  
7-7  
7-8  
7-9  
Preparing to drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10  
Driving in foreign countries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10  
Periodic inspections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10  
Ignition switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11  
LOCK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
ACC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
START . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Key reminder chime . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Key interlock release (AT vehicles only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
7-11  
7-12  
7-12  
7-13  
7-13  
7-13  
7
Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14  
Manual transmission vehicles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Automatic transmission vehicles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
During cold weather below –4°F (–20°C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Flooded engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
7-14  
7-14  
7-15  
7-15  
Stopping the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16  
Manual transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16  
Shifting speed for fuel economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Maximum speeds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Driving tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
7-17  
7-17  
7-17  
Automatic transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18  
Selector lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Maximum speeds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Driving tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Shift lock release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
7-19  
7-21  
7-21  
7-21  
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-23  
Tilt steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Power steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
7-23  
7-23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Cruise control (if equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-24  
To set cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
To temporarily cancel the cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
To turn off the cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
To change the cruising speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
7-24  
7-25  
7-25  
7-25  
Parking your vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-26  
Parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Parking tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
7-26  
7-27  
Tips for using the brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-28  
Braking tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Disc brake pad wear warning indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
ABS (Anti-Lock Brake System) (if equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
7-28  
7-29  
7-30  
7-30  
Driving tips for AWD vehicles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-33  
Off road driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-34  
All AWD models except OUTBACK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
OUTBACK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
7-34  
7-35  
Winter driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-37  
Operation during cold weather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Driving on snowy and icy roads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Snow tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Tire chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Rocking the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Corrosion protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
7-37  
7-39  
7-40  
7-41  
7-41  
7-42  
Loading your vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-42  
Vehicle capacity weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
GVWR and GAWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating and Gross Axle  
Weight Rating) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
7-43  
7-43  
Trailer towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-44  
Warranties and maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Maximum load limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Trailer hitches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Trailer lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Side mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Trailer towing tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
7-45  
7-45  
7-46  
7-47  
7-47  
7-47  
7-48  
7-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Starting and operating  
New vehicle break-in driving  
J The first 1,000 miles (1,600 km)  
The performance and long life of your vehicle are dependent on how you  
handle and care for your vehicle while it is new. Follow these instructions  
during the first 1,000 miles (1,600 km):  
D Do not race the engine.  
B Break-in engine speed limit  
D Vehicle with tachometer  
Never exceed 4,000 rpm engine speed except for brief acceleration  
in an emergency.  
D Vehicle without tachometer (for manual transmission)  
Do not exceed the speed limits below for each gear position except  
for brief acceleration in an emergency.  
mph (km/h)  
1st  
2nd  
3rd  
4th  
20 (30)  
30 (50)  
50 (80)  
65 (105)  
D Vehicles without tachometer (for automatic transmission)  
Try to drive at moderate speeds while accelerating and braking  
smoothly. Proper gears are selected automatically according to the  
driving conditions.  
D Do not drive at one constant engine or vehicle speed for a long time,  
either fast or slow.  
D Avoid starting suddenly and rapid acceleration, except in an emer-  
gency.  
D Avoid hard braking, except in an emergency.  
The same break-in procedures should be applied to an overhauled en-  
gine, newly mounted engine or when brake pads or brake linings are re-  
placed with new ones.  
7-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Fuel requirements  
J Fuel octane rating  
Your engine is designed to use only unleaded gasoline with an octane  
rating of 87 AKI or higher. This octane rating is the average of the Re-  
search Octane and Motor Octane numbers and is commonly referred to  
as the Anti Knock Index (AKI).  
Using a gasoline with a lower octane rating can cause persistent and  
heavy knocking, which can damage the engine. Do not be concerned if  
your vehicle sometimes knocks lightly when you drive up a hill or when  
you accelerate. See your dealer or a qualified service technician if you  
use a gasoline with the specified octane rating and your vehicle knocks  
heavily or persistently.  
J Unleaded gasoline  
The neck of the fuel filler pipe is designed to accept only an unleaded  
gasoline filler nozzle. Under no circumstances should leaded gasoline  
be used because it will damage the emission control system and may  
impair driveability and fuel economy.  
J Gasoline for California-certified LEV and TLEV  
If your vehicle is a California-certified Low Emission Vehicle (LEV) or  
Transitional Low Emission Vehicle (TLEV) as indicated on the underhood  
tune-up label, it is designed to optimize engine and emission control sys-  
tem performance with gasoline that meets California specifications. Your  
vehicle will operate on gasoline meeting Federal specifications.  
J Gasoline for cleaner air  
CAUTION  
Do not let fuel spill on the exterior surfaces of the vehicle. Fuels  
containing alcohol may cause paint damage, which is not cov-  
ered under the SUBARU Limited Warranty.  
Your use of gasoline with detergent additives will help prevent deposits  
from forming in your engine and fuel system. This helps keep your en-  
7-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Starting and operating  
gine in tune and your emission control system working properly, and is a  
way of doing your part for cleaner air. If you continuously use a high  
quality fuel with the proper detergent and other additives, you should  
never need to add any fuel system cleaning agents to your fuel rank.  
Many gasolines are now blended with materials called oxygenates. Use  
of these fuels can also help keep the air cleaner. SUBARU approves the  
use of oxygenated blend fuels, such as MTBE (Methyl Tertiary Butyl  
Ether) or ethanol (ethyl or grain alcohol). The blended fuels should con-  
tain no more than 15% MTBE or 10% ethanol for the proper operation of  
your SUBARU.  
In addition, some gasoline suppliers are now producing reformulated  
gasolines, which are designed to reduce vehicle emissions. SUBARU  
approves the use of reformulated gasoline.  
If you are not sure what the fuel contains, you should ask your service  
station operators if their gasolines contain detergents and oxygenates  
and if they have been reformulated to reduce vehicle emissions.  
As additional guidance, only use fuels suited for your vehicle as ex-  
plained below.  
D Fuel should be unleaded and have an octane rating no lower than  
that specified in this manual.  
D Methanol (methyl or wood alcohol) is sometimes mixed with un-  
leaded gasoline. Methanol can be used in your vehicle ONLY if it  
does not exceed 5% of the fuel mixture AND if it is accompanied by  
sufficient quantities of the proper cosolvents and corrosion inhibitors  
required to prevent damage to the fuel system. Do not use fuel con-  
taining methanol EXCEPT under these conditions.  
D If undesirable driveability problems are experienced and you sus-  
pect they may be fuel related, try a different brand of gasoline before  
seeking service at your SUBARU dealer.  
D Fuel system damage or driveability problems which result from the  
use of improper fuel are not covered under the SUBARU Limited War-  
ranty.  
7-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
State emission testing (U.S. only)  
WARNING  
Testing of a Full-Time All Wheel drive vehicle must NEVER be  
performed on a single two-wheel dynamometer. Attempting to do  
so will result in uncontrolled vehicle movement and may cause  
an accident or injuries to persons nearby.  
CAUTION  
Resultant vehicle damage due to improper testing is not covered  
under the SUBARU Limited Warranty and is the responsibility of  
the state inspection program or its contractors or licensees.  
At state inspection time, remember to tell your inspection or service  
station in advance not to place your SUBARU AWD vehicle on a two-  
wheel dynamometer. Otherwise, serious transmission damage will  
result.  
Some states have started using dynamometers in their state inspection  
programs in order to meet their obligation under federal law to implement  
stricter vehicle emission standards to reduce air pollution from cars. A  
dynamometer is a treadmill or roller-like testing device that allows your  
car’s wheels to turn while the car remains in one place. Depending on  
the severity of a state’s air pollution problems, the states must adopt  
either a “basic” or “enhanced” vehicle emission inspection test. Nor-  
mally, a portion of the basic emission test consists of an emission  
inspector inserting an analyzer probe into the exhaust pipe of an idling  
vehicle for a short period of time. States with more severe air pollution  
problems are required to adopt an enhanced vehicle emission test. This  
test simulates actual driving conditions on a dynamometer and permits  
more accurate measurement of tailpipe emitted pollution than the basic  
emission test.  
The U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) and states using two-  
wheel dynamometers in their emission testing programs have  
7-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Starting and operating  
EXEMPTED SUBARU AWD vehicles from the portion of the testing pro-  
gram that involves a two-wheel dynamometer.  
There are some states that use four-wheel dynamometers in their testing  
programs. When properly used, that equipment will not damage an AWD  
SUBARU vehicle.  
Under no circumstances should the rear wheels be jacked off the  
ground, nor should the driveshaft be disconnected for state emission  
testing.  
Engine exhaust gas (Carbon monoxide)  
WARNING  
D Never inhale engine exhaust gas. Engine exhaust gas contains  
carbon monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas which is danger-  
ous, or even lethal, if inhaled.  
D Always properly maintain the engine exhaust system to pre-  
vent engine exhaust gas from entering the vehicle.  
D Never run the engine in a closed space, such as a garage, ex-  
cept for the brief time needed to drive the vehicle in or out of it.  
D Avoid remaining in a parked vehicle for a lengthy time while  
the engine is running. If that is unavoidable, then use the ventila-  
tion fan to force fresh air into the vehicle.  
D Always keep the front ventilator inlet grille free from snow,  
leaves or other obstructions to ensure that the ventilation system  
always works properly.  
D If at any time you suspect that exhaust fumes are entering the  
vehicle, have the problem checked and corrected as soon as pos-  
sible. If you must drive under these conditions, drive only with all  
windows fully open.  
D Keep the trunk lid or rear gate closed while driving to prevent  
exhaust gas from entering the vehicle.  
– CONTINUED–  
7-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
NOTE  
Due to the expansion and contraction of the metals used in the manufac-  
ture of the exhaust system, you may hear a crackling sound coming from  
the exhaust system for a short time after the engine has been shut off.  
This sound is normal.  
Catalytic converter  
WARNING  
D Avoid fire hazards. Do not drive or park the vehicle anywhere  
near flammable materials (e.g. grass, paper, rags or leaves), be-  
cause the catalytic converter operates at very high temperatures.  
D Keep everyone and flammable materials away from the ex-  
haust pipe while the engine is running. The exhaust gas is very  
hot.  
Catalytic converter  
OM-H0381  
The catalytic converter is installed in the exhaust system. It serves as a  
catalyst to reduce HC, CO and NOx in exhaust gases, thus providing  
cleaner exhaust.  
To avoid damage to the catalytic converter:  
D Use only unleaded fuel. Even a small amount of leaded fuel will dam-  
age the catalytic converter.  
D Never start the engine by pushing or pulling the vehicle.  
7-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Starting and operating  
D Avoid racing the engine.  
D Never turn off the ignition switch while the vehicle is moving.  
D Keep your engine tuned-up. If you feel the engine running rough (mis-  
firing, backfiring or incomplete combustion), have your vehicle checked  
and repaired by an authorized SUBARU dealer.  
D Do not apply undercoating or rust prevention treatment to the heat  
shield of catalytic converter and the exhaust system  
Fuel economy hints  
The following suggestions will help to save your fuel.  
D Select the proper gear position for the speed and road conditions.  
D Avoid sudden acceleration or deceleration. Always accelerate  
gently until you reach the desired speed. Then try to maintain that  
speed for as long as possible.  
D Do not pump the accelerator and avoid racing the engine.  
D Avoid unnecessary engine idling.  
D Keep the engine properly tuned.  
D Keep the tires inflated to the correct pressure shown on the tire  
placard, which is located under the door latch on the driver’s side.  
Low pressure will increase tire wear and fuel consumption.  
D Use the air conditioner only when necessary.  
D Keep the front and rear wheels in proper alignment.  
D Avoid carrying unnecessary luggage or cargo.  
7-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Preparing to drive  
You should perform the following checks and adjustments every day be-  
fore you start driving.  
1. Check that all windows, mirrors, and lights are clean and unob-  
structed.  
2. Check the appearance and condition of the tires. Also check tires for  
proper inflation.  
3. Look under the vehicle for any sign of the leaks.  
4. Check that the hood, trunk and rear gate are fully closed.  
5. Check the adjustment of the seat.  
6. Check the adjustment of the inside and outside mirrors.  
7. Fasten your seat belt. Check that your passengers have fastened  
their seat belts.  
8. Check the operation of the warning and indicator lights when the igni-  
tion switch is turned to the “ON” position.  
9. Check the gauges, indicator and warning lights after starting the en-  
gine.  
NOTE  
Engine oil, engine coolant, brake fluid, washer fluid and other fluid levels  
should be checked daily, weekly or at fuel stops.  
Driving in foreign countries  
When planning to use your vehicle in another country:  
D Confirm the availability of the correct fuel. (Refer to Fuel Require-  
ment section in this chapter.)  
D Comply with all regulations and requirements of each country.  
Periodic inspections  
To keep your vehicle in the best condition at all times, always have the  
recommended maintenance services listed in the maintenance schedule  
in the Warranty and Maintenance Booklet performed at the specified  
time or mileage intervals.  
7-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Starting and operating  
Ignition switch  
WARNING  
Never turn the ignition switch to “LOCK” while the vehicle is be-  
ing driven or towed because that will lock the steering wheel, pre-  
venting steering control. And when the engine is turned off, it  
takes a much greater effort than usual to steer.  
The ignition switch has four positions: LOCK, ACC, ON and START.  
J LOCK  
The key can only be inserted or removed in this position. The ignition  
switch will lock the steering wheel when you remove the key.  
If turning the key is difficult, turn the steering wheel slightly to the right  
and left as you turn the key.  
– CONTINUED–  
7-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
B Automatic transmission vehicles  
23  
HG0101  
The key can be turned from “ACC” to “LOCK” only when the selector  
lever is in the “P” position.  
B Manual transmission vehicles  
1
2
OM-H0144  
The key can be turned from “ACC” to “LOCK” only when the key is  
pushed in while turning it.  
J ACC  
In this position the electrical accessories (radio, accessory socket, etc.)  
can be used.  
J ON  
This is the normal operating position after the engine is started.  
7-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Starting and operating  
J START  
CAUTION  
Do not turn the ignition switch to the “START” position while the  
engine is running.  
The engine is started in this position. The starter cranks the engine to  
start it. When the key is released (after the engine has started), the key  
automatically returns to the “ON” position.  
J Key reminder chime  
The reminder chime sounds when the driver’s door opens and the key is  
in the “LOCK” or “ACC” positions. The chime stops when the key is re-  
moved from the ignition switch.  
J Key interlock release (AT vehicles only)  
If the key can not be turned to the “LOCK” position even when the selec-  
tor lever is in the “P” position:  
Release lever  
Vehicle  
front  
HS0126  
HS0127  
1. Take out the screwdriver from the tool bag.  
2. Remove three screws securing the undercover of the steering col-  
umn.  
3. Remove the undercover of the steering column.  
4. Turn the ignition key while pressing the key interlock release lever.  
Take your vehicle to the nearest SUBARU dealer immediately to have the  
key interlock system repaired.  
7-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Starting the engine  
CAUTION  
Do not operate the starter motor continuously for more than ten  
seconds. If the engine fails to start after operating the starter for  
five to ten seconds, wait for ten seconds or more before trying  
again.  
J Manual transmission vehicles  
1. Apply the parking brake.  
2. Turn off unnecessary lights and accessories.  
3. Press the clutch pedal to the floor and shift the shift lever into neutral.  
Hold the clutch pedal to the floor while starting the engine. The starter  
motor will only operate when the clutch pedal is pressed fully to the floor.  
4. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON” position and check the operation  
of the warning and indicator lights. Refer to Warning and Indicator Lights  
section (chapter 3).  
5. Turn the ignition switch to the “START” position without depressing the  
accelerator pedal. Release the key immediately after the engine has  
started.  
If the engine does not start within ten seconds, wait a while and then turn  
the ignition switch to the “START” position again while depressing the ac-  
celerator pedal half way down.  
6. Confirm that all warning and indicator lights have gone off after the  
engine has started. The fuel injection system automatically lowers the  
idle speed as the engine warms up.  
J Automatic transmission vehicles  
CAUTION  
If you restart the engine while the vehicle is moving, shift the se-  
lector lever into the “N” position. Do not attempt to place the se-  
lector lever of a moving vehicle into the “P” position.  
7-14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Starting and operating  
1. Apply the parking brake.  
2. Turn off unnecessary lights and accessories.  
3. Shift the selector lever to the “P” or “N” position (preferably “P” posi-  
tion).  
The starter will only operate when the select lever is at the “P” or “N”  
position.  
4. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON” position and check the operation  
of the warning and indicator lights. Refer to Warning and Indicator Lights  
section (chapter 3).  
5. Turn the ignition switch to the “START” position without depressing  
the accelerator pedal. Release the key immediately after the engine has  
started.  
If the engine does not start within ten seconds, wait a while and then turn  
the ignition switch to the “START” position again while depressing the ac-  
celerator pedal half way down.  
6. Confirm that all warning and indicator lights have gone out after the  
engine has started. The fuel injection system automatically lowers the  
idle speed as the engine warms up.  
While the engine is warming up, make sure that the selector lever is at  
the “P” or “N” position and that the parking brake is applied.  
J During cold weather below 4°F (20°C)  
If the engine is difficult to start using the normal method (without de-  
pressing the accelerator pedal), turn the ignition switch to the “START”  
position while slightly depressing the accelerator pedal.  
J Flooded engine  
If the engine does not start, it may be flooded (excessive fuel in the en-  
gine).  
In case of a flooded engine, turn the starter motor for five seconds with  
the accelerator pedal fully depressed. Repeat this two or three times until  
the engine starts. Release the ignition switch and accelerator pedal as  
soon as the engine starts.  
7-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Stopping the engine  
WARNING  
Do not stop the engine when the vehicle is moving. This will  
cause loss of power to the power steering and the brake booster,  
making steering and braking more difficult. It could also result in  
accidental activation of the “LOCK” position on the ignition  
switch, causing the steering wheel to lock.  
The ignition switch should be turned off only when the engine is idling.  
Manual transmission  
CAUTION  
Shift into reverse ONLY when the vehicle has completely  
stopped. It may cause damage to the transmission to try shifting  
into reverse when the vehicle is moving.  
The manual transmission is a fully synchromeshed 5-forward and 1-re-  
verse speed transmission.  
HS0365  
The shift pattern is shown on the shift lever knob. When shifting from 5th  
gear to reverse gear, first return the shift lever to neutral position then  
7-16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Starting and operating  
shift into the reverse gear.  
To change gears, fully depress the clutch pedal, move the shift lever,  
and gradually let the pedal up.  
J Shifting speed for fuel economy  
The best compromise between fuel economy and vehicle performance  
during normal driving is ensured by shifting up at the speeds listed in the  
following table.  
Shift up  
1st to 2nd  
2nd to 3rd  
3rd to 4th  
4th to 5th  
mph (km/h)  
15 (24)  
25 (40)  
40 (65)  
45 (73)  
J Maximum speeds  
B Vehicle with tachometer  
Never drive with the tachometer needle in the critical engine speed  
range except for brief acceleration in an emergency.  
B Vehicle without tachometer  
Never exceed the speed limits below for each gear position except  
for brief acceleration in an emergency.  
mph (km/h)  
1st  
2nd  
3rd  
28 (45)  
50 (80)  
70 (115)  
J Driving tips  
Do not drive with your foot resting on the clutch pedal and do not use the  
clutch to hold your vehicle at standstill on an upgrade. Either of those  
– CONTINUED–  
7-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
actions may cause clutch damage.  
Do not drive with your hand resting on the shift lever. This may cause  
wear on the transmission components.  
When it is necessary to reduce vehicle speed due to slow traffic, turning  
corners, or driving up steep hills, downshift to a lower gear before the  
engine starts to labor.  
On steep downgrades, downshift the transmission to 4th, 3rd or 2nd  
gear as necessary; this helps to maintain a safe speed and to extend  
brake pad life.  
In this way, the engine provides a braking effect. Remember, if you “ride”  
(over use) the brakes while descending a hill, they may overheat and not  
work properly.  
Automatic transmission  
WARNING  
Do not shift from the “P” or “N” position into the “D”, “3”, “2”,  
“1” or “R” position while depressing the accelerator pedal. This  
may cause the vehicle to jump forward or backward.  
CAUTION  
D Shift into the “P” or “R” position only after the vehicle is com-  
pletely stopped. Shifting while the vehicle is moving may cause  
damage to the transmission.  
D Do not race the engine for more than five seconds in any posi-  
tion except the “N” or “P” position when the brake is set or the  
tires are on blocks. This may cause the automatic transmission  
fluid to overheat.  
D Avoid shifting from one of the forward driving positions into  
the “R” position or vice versa until the vehicle has completely  
stopped. Such a shifting may cause damage to the transmission.  
7-18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Starting and operating  
The automatic transmission is an electronically controlled with 4-forward  
speeds and 1-reverse speed.  
J Selector lever  
With the brake pedal  
depressed, shift while  
pressing the button in  
hift while pressing  
the button in  
Release button  
Shift without pressing  
the button  
HS0129  
OM-H0149  
The selector lever has seven positions.  
The release button must be pushed to select the “P”, “R”, or “2” posi-  
tions.  
B P (Park)  
This position is for parking the vehicle and starting the engine.  
In this position, the transmission is mechanically locked to prevent the  
vehicle from rolling freely.  
When you park the vehicle, first set the parking brake fully, then shift  
into the “P” position. Do not hold the vehicle only with the transmis-  
sion.  
The shift interlock function is employed in this automatic transmission  
system to ensure safety of starting the vehicle.  
To shift the selector lever from the “P” to the any other position, you  
have to depress the brake pedal fully then push the release button on  
the selector lever when the ignition switch is in the “ON” position. This  
prevents the vehicle from lurching off when starting.  
If the shift lever should not move from the “P” position with the brake  
pedal depressed and the release button pushed in when the ignition  
– CONTINUED–  
7-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
switch is in the “ON” position, refer to Releasing shift interlock in this  
chapter.  
B R (Reverse)  
This position is for backing the vehicle.  
To shift from the “N” to “R” position, first stop the vehicle completely  
then move the lever to the “R” position while pushing the release but-  
ton.  
B N (Neutral)  
This position is for restarting a stalled engine.  
In this position the wheels and transmission are not locked. In this  
position, the transmission is neutral; the vehicle will roll freely, even on  
the slightest incline unless the parking brake or brakes are on.  
Avoid coasting with the transmission neutral. During coasting, the  
engine braking does not act.  
B D (Drive)  
This position is for normal driving.  
The transmission automatically shifts into a suitable gear from 1st to  
4th according to the vehicle speed and the acceleration you require.  
When more acceleration is required in this position, press the acceler-  
ator pedal fully to the floor and hold that position. The transmission  
will automatically downshift to 3rd, 2nd or 1st gear. When you release  
the pedal, the transmission will return to the original gear position.  
B 3 (Third)  
This position is for using engine braking when going down a hill or for  
climbing a grade.  
The transmission automatically shifts into a suitable gear from 1st to  
3rd according to the vehicle speed and the acceleration you require.  
When more acceleration is required in this position, press the acceler-  
ator pedal fully to the floor and hold that position. The transmission  
will automatically downshift to 2nd or 1st gear. When you release the  
pedal, the transmission will return to the original gear position.  
7-20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Starting and operating  
B 2 (Second)  
To shift from the “3” position, push the release button.  
This position is for using engine braking when going down a hill or for  
climbing a steep grade.  
In this position, the transmission holds in the 2nd gear.  
Use this position when starting off form a standstill on slippery road  
surfaces such as mud or snow. It will ensure greater traction.  
B 1 (First)  
This position is for driving up or down very steep grades, or driving  
through mud or sand, or on slippery surfaces. In this position, the  
transmission holds in the 1st gear.  
J Maximum speeds  
Never drive with the tachometer needle in the critical engine speed  
range except for brief acceleration in an emergency.  
J Driving tips  
D Always apply the foot or parking brake when the vehicle is stopped in  
the “D”, “3”, “2”, “1”, or “R” position.  
D Always set the parking brake when parking your vehicle. Do not hold  
the vehicle only with the transmission.  
D Do not keep the vehicle in a stationary position on an uphill grade by  
using the “D”, “3”, “2” or “1” position. Use the brake instead.  
J Shift lock release  
If the selector lever does not move from the “P” position with the brake  
pedal depressed and the release button pushed in, perform the follow-  
ing steps:  
To override the shift lock:  
1. Set the parking brake and stop the engine.  
– CONTINUED–  
7-21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
HS0130  
HS0131  
2. Take out the screwdriver from the tool bag.  
3. Open the center console and remove two screws securing the park-  
ing brake lever cover.  
4. Remove the parking brake lever cover by pulling up on the cover’s  
rear end.  
5. Raise the rear end of the selector lever cover.  
Shaft portion of  
the screwdriver  
HS0132  
6. Draw the shaft portion of the screwdriver from the grip and then insert  
the shaft into the hole.  
7. Push down on the shaft while pushing the release button and move  
the selector lever from the “P” to the “N” position.  
8. Remove the shaft from the hole. Depress the brake pedal and start  
the engine.  
Take your vehicle to the nearest SUBARU dealer immediately to have the  
system repaired.  
7-22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Starting and operating  
Steering  
J Tilt steering wheel  
WARNING  
Do not adjust the steering tilt position while driving. This may  
cause loss of vehicle control and result in personal injury.  
B Tilt adjustment  
1. Adjust the seat position. Refer to Front Seat section (chapter 2).  
2. Pull the tilt lock lever down.  
3. Move the steering wheel to the desired level.  
4. Push the lever up to lock the steering wheel in place.  
5. Make sure that the steering wheel is securely locked by moving it  
up and down.  
J Power steering  
CAUTION  
Do not hold the steering wheel at the fully locked position left or  
right for more than five seconds. This may damage the power  
steering pump.  
The power steering system operates only when the engine is running.  
– CONTINUED–  
7-23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
If you lose power steering assist because the engine stops or the system  
fails to function, you can steer but it will take much more effort.  
Cruise control (if equipped)  
WARNING  
Do not use the cruise control under any of the following condi-  
tions. This may cause loss of vehicle control:  
D driving up or down a steep grade  
D driving on slippery or winding roads  
D driving in heavy traffic  
Cruise control enables you to maintain a constant vehicle speed without  
holding your foot on the accelerator pedal and it is operative when the  
vehicle speed is 25 mph (40 km/h) or more.  
Make sure the main switch is turned “OFF” when the cruise control is not  
in use to avoid unintentional cruise settiing.  
J To set cruise control  
Cruise main switch  
Cruise control lever  
HG0311  
HG0312  
1. Push the “CRUISE” main switch.  
2. Depress the accelerator pedal until the vehicle reaches to the desired  
speed.  
3. Push the control lever downward in the “SET, COAST” direction and  
release it. Then release the accelerator pedal.  
7-24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Starting and operating  
The vehicle will maintain the desired speed.  
Vehicle speed can be temporarily increased while driving with the cruise  
control activated. Simply depress the accelerator pedal to accelerate the  
vehicle. When the accelerator pedal is released, the vehicle will return to  
and maintain the previous cruising speed.  
J To temporarily cancel the cruise control  
There are four ways to cancel the cruise control temporarily:  
D Depress the brake pedal.  
D Pull the control lever in the “CANCEL” direction.  
D Depress the clutch pedal (manual transmission vehicles only).  
D Shift the selector lever into the “N” position (automatic transmission  
vehicles only).  
To resume the cruise control after it has been temporarily canceled and  
with vehicle speed of 25 mph (40 km/h) or more, push the control lever  
upward in the “ACCEL, RESUME” direction to return to the original cruis-  
ing speed automatically.  
J To turn off the cruise control  
There are two ways to turn off the cruise control:  
D Push the main switch again.  
D Turn the ignition switch to the “ACC” position (but only when the  
vehicle is completely stopped).  
J To change the cruising speed  
B To increase the speed  
1. Push the control lever upward in the “ACCEL, RESUME” direction  
and hold it until the vehicle reaches the desired speed.  
The control lever can be used for increasing the cruising speed slight-  
ly. Pressing the control lever upward in the “ACCEL, RESUME” direc-  
tion increases the vehicle speed about 1 mph (1.6 km/h). Press the  
control lever repeatedly until the desired speed is reached.  
OR  
1. Depress the accelerator pedal to accelerate the vehicle to the de-  
– CONTINUED–  
7-25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
sired speed.  
2. Push the control lever downward in the “SET, COAST” direction  
once. Now the desired speed is set and the vehicle will keep running  
at that speed without depressing the accelerator pedal.  
B To decrease the speed  
1. Push the control lever downward in the “SET, COAST” direction  
and hold it until the vehicle reaches the desired speed.  
The control lever can be used for decreasing the cruising speed  
slightly. Pressing the control lever downward in the “SET, COAST”  
direction decreases the vehicle speed about 1 mph (1.6 km/h). Press  
the control lever repeatedly until the desired speed is reached.  
OR  
1. Depress the brake pedal to release cruise control temporarily.  
2. When the speed decreases to the desired speed, press the control  
lever downward in the “SET, COAST” direction once. Now the desired  
speed is set and the vehicle will keep running at that speed without  
depressing the accelerator pedal.  
Parking your vehicle  
J Parking brake  
CAUTION  
Never drive while the parking brake is set because this will cause  
unnecessary wear on the brake linings. Before starting to drive,  
always make sure that the parking brake has been fully released.  
To set the parking brake, press the brake pedal firmly and hold it down  
while fully pulling up the parking brake lever.  
7-26  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Starting and operating  
Release button  
HG0313  
To release the parking brake, pull the lever up slightly, press the release  
button, then lower the lever while keeping the button pressed.  
When the parking brake is set while the engine is running, the parking  
brake warning light comes on. After starting the vehicle, be sure that the  
warning light has gone out before the vehicle is driven. Refer to Warning  
and Indicator Lights section (chapter 3).  
J Parking tips  
WARNING  
D Never leave unattended children or pets in the vehicle. They  
could accidentally injure themselves or others through inadver-  
tent operation of the vehicle. Also, on hot or sunny days, the tem-  
perature in a closed vehicle could quickly become high enough  
to cause severe or possibly fatal injuries to them.  
D Do not park the vehicle over flammable materials such as dry  
grass, waste paper or rags, as they may burn easily if they come  
near hot engine or exhaust system parts.  
D Always stop the engine if you take a nap in the vehicle. If en-  
gine exhaust gas enters the passenger compartment, occupants  
in the vehicle could die from carbon monoxide (CO) contained in  
the exhaust gas.  
– CONTINUED–  
7-27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
When parking your vehicle, always set the parking brake firmly and put  
the shift lever in the “1” (1st) for an upgrade or “R” (Reverse) for a down  
grade for manual transmission vehicles, or in the “P” (Park) position for  
automatic transmission vehicles.  
Always set the parking brake firmly when parking your vehicle. Never  
rely on the transmission alone to hold the vehicle.  
For better parking brake power, depress the brake pedal firmly while set-  
ting the parking brake.  
OM-H0161  
OM-H0162  
When parking on a hill, always turn the steering wheel. When the vehicle  
is headed up the hill, the front wheels should be turned away from the  
curb. When facing down hill, the front wheels should be turned into the  
curb.  
Tips for using the brakes  
J Braking tips  
WARNING  
Never rest your foot on the brake pedal while driving. This can  
cause dangerous overheating of the brakes and needless wear  
on the brake pads and linings.  
7-28  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Starting and operating  
B When the brakes get wet  
When driving in rain, in puddle or after washing the vehicle, the  
brakes may get wet. As a result, brake stopping distance will be long-  
er. To dry the brakes, drive the vehicle at a safe speed while lightly  
depressing the brake pedal to heat up the brakes.  
B Use of engine braking  
Remember to make use of engine braking in addition to foot braking.  
When descending a grade, if only the foot brake is used, the brakes  
may start working improperly because of brake fluid overheating,  
caused by overheated brake pads. To help prevent this, shift into a  
lower gear to get stronger engine braking.  
B Braking when a tire is punctured  
Do not depress the brake pedal suddenly when a tire is punctured.  
This could cause a loss of control of the vehicle. Keep driving straight  
ahead while gradually reducing speed. Then slowly pull off the road  
to a safe place.  
J Brake system  
B Two separate circuits  
Your vehicle has two separate circuit brake systems. Each circuit  
works diagonally across the vehicle. If one circuit of the brake system  
should fail, the other half of the system still works. If one circuit fails,  
the brake pedal will goes down much closer to the floor than usual  
and you need to press it down much harder. And a much longer dis-  
tance will be needed to stop the vehicle.  
B Brake booster  
The brake booster uses engine manifold vacuum to assist braking  
force. Do not turn off the engine while driving because that will turn off  
the brake booster, resulting in poor braking power.  
The brakes will continue to work even when the brake booster com-  
pletely stops functioning. If this happens, however, you will have to  
push the pedal much harder than normal and the braking distance  
will increase.  
– CONTINUED–  
7-29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
J Disc brake pad wear warning indicators  
3  
The disc brake pad wear warning indicators on the disc brakes give a  
warning noise when the brake pads are worn.  
If a squeaking or scraping noise is heard from the disc brakes while  
braking, immediately have your vehicle checked by your SUBARU deal-  
er.  
J ABS (Anti-Lock Brake System) (if equipped)  
WARNING  
Always use the utmost care in driving – overconfidence because  
you are driving with an ABS equipped vehicle could easily lead to  
a serious accident.  
CAUTION  
D The ABS system cannot always decrease stopping distance.  
Therefore always maintain a safe distance from the vehicle in  
front of you.  
D When driving on badly surfaced roads, gravel roads, icy roads,  
or over deep newly fallen snow, stopping distances may be long-  
er for a vehicle with the ABS system than one without. When driv-  
ing under these conditions, therefore, reduce your speed and  
leave ample distance from other vehicles.  
7-30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Starting and operating  
D When you feel the ABS system operating, you should maintain  
constant brake pedal pressure. Do not pump the brake pedal  
since doing so may defeat the operation of the ABS system.  
The ABS system prevents the lock-up of wheels which may occur during  
sudden braking or braking on slippery road surfaces. This helps prevent  
the loss of steering control and directional stability caused by wheel  
lock-up.  
When the ABS system is operating, you may hear a chattering noise or  
feel a slight vibration in the brake pedal. This is normal when the ABS  
operates.  
The ABS system will not operate when the vehicle speed is below  
approximately 6 mph (10 km/h).  
B ABS system self-checking  
You may feel a slight shock in the brake pedal and hear the operating  
sound of ABS from the engine compartment just after the vehicle  
started. These are caused by an automatic functional test of the ABS  
system being carried out and does not indicate any abnormal condi-  
tion.  
B ABS warning light  
HG0346  
The ABS warning light comes on when the ignition switch is turned to  
the “ON” position and goes out after about two seconds.  
This is an indication that the ABS system is working properly.  
– CONTINUED–  
7-31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
If the warning light behaves as follows, ABS system may not work  
properly.  
D The warning light does not come on when the ignition switch is  
turned to the “ON” position.  
D The warning light comes on when the ignition switch is turned to  
the “ON” position, but it does not go out even when the vehicle speed  
exceeds approximately 8mph (12km/h).  
D The warning light comes on during driving.  
When the warning light is on, the ABS function shuts down; however,  
the conventional brake system continues to operate normally. If this  
occurs, have the ABS system repaired at the first available opportuni-  
ty by your SUBARU dealer.  
NOTE  
If the warning light behavior is as shown below, the ABS system may  
be considered normal.  
D The warning light comes on right after the engine is started but  
goes out immediately, remaining off.  
D The warning light remains on after the engine has been started,  
but it goes out when the vehicle speed reaches about 8 mph (12  
km/h).  
D The warning light comes on during driving, but it goes out immedi-  
ately and remains off.  
When driving with an insufficient battery voltage such as when the en-  
gine is jump started, the ABS warning light may come on. This is due  
to the low battery voltage and does not indicate a malfunction. When  
the battery becomes fully charged, the light will go out.  
7-32  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Starting and operating  
Driving tips for AWD vehicles  
WARNING  
D Always maintain a safe driving speed according to the road  
and weather conditions in order to avoid having an accident on a  
sharp turn, during sudden braking or under other similar condi-  
tions.  
D Always use the utmost care in driving – overconfidence be-  
cause you are driving an all wheel drive vehicle could easily lead  
to a serious accident.  
HS0113  
All wheel drive distributes the engine power to all four wheels. AWD  
vehicles provide better traction when driving on slippery, wet or snow-  
covered roads and when moving out of mud, dirt and sand. By shifting  
power between the front and rear wheels, SUBARU AWD can also pro-  
vide added traction during acceleration and added engine braking force  
during deceleration.  
Therefore, your SUBARU AWD vehicle may handle differently than an  
ordinary two wheel drive vehicle and it contains some features unique to  
AWD. For safety purposes as well as to avoid damaging the AWD sys-  
tem, you should keep the following tips in mind:  
D An AWD vehicle is better able to climb steeper roads under snowy or  
slippery conditions than a two wheel drive vehicle. There is little differ-  
– CONTINUED–  
7-33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ence in handling, however, during extremely sharp turns or sudden brak-  
ing. Therefore, when driving down a slope or turning corners, be sure to  
reduce your speed and maintain an ample distance from other vehicles.  
D When replacing a tire, make sure you use only the same size, construc-  
tion, brand, and load range as the original tires listed on the tire placard.  
Using other sizes or construction may result in severe mechanical dam-  
age to the drive train of your vehicle and may affect ride, handling, brak-  
ing, speedometer/odometer calibration, and clearance between the body  
and tires. It also may be dangerous and lead to loss of vehicle control.  
D If you use a temporary spare tire to replace a flat tire, be sure to use  
the original temporary spare tire stored in the vehicle. Using other sizes  
may result in severe mechanical damage to the drive train of your vehicle.  
D Always check the cold tire pressure before starting to drive. The rec-  
ommended tire pressure is provided on the tire placard, which is located  
under the door latch on the driver’s side.  
D Tire chains should always be placed on the front wheels only.  
D There are some precautions that you must observe when towing your  
vehicle. For detail information, see the Towing section in chapter 8.  
Off road driving  
WARNING  
D Always maintain a safe driving speed according to the road  
and weather conditions in order to avoid having an accident on a  
sharp turn, during sudden braking or under other similar condi-  
tions.  
D Always use the utmost care in driving – overconfidence  
because you are driving an all wheel drive vehicle could easily  
lead to a serious accident.  
J All AWD models except OUTBACK  
Your AWD vehicle is neither a conventional off-road vehicle nor an all ter-  
rain vehicle. It is a passenger car designed primarily for on-road use.  
The AWD feature gives it some limited off-road capabilities in situation in  
7-34  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Starting and operating  
which driving surfaces a relatively level, obstruction-free and otherwise  
similar to on-road driving conditions. Operating it under other than those  
conditions could subject the vehicle to excessive stress which might re-  
sult in damage not eligible for repair under warranty. If you do take your  
SUBARU off road, you should review the common sense precautions in  
the next section (applicable to the OUTBACK) for general guidance. But  
please keep in mind that your vehicle’s off-road capabilities are more lim-  
ited than those of the OUTBACK.  
J OUTBACK  
Because of the AWD feature and higher ground clearance, your Subaru  
can be driven on ordinary roads or off-road. But please keep in mind that  
an AWD Subaru is a passenger car and is neither a conventional off-road  
vehicle nor an all-terrain vehicle. If you do take your Subaru off-road, cer-  
tain common sense precautions such as the following should be taken:  
D Make certain that you and all of your passengers are wearing seat  
belts.  
D Carry some emergency equipment, such as a towing rope or chain, a  
shovel, wheel blocks, first aid kit and portable phone or citizens band  
radio.  
D Drive carefully. Do not take unnecessary risks by driving in dangerous  
areas or over rough terrain.  
D Slow down and employ extra caution at all times. When driving off-  
road, you will not have the benefit of marked traffic lanes, banked  
curves, traffic signs and the like.  
D Do not drive across steep slopes. Instead, drive either straight up or  
straight down the slopes. A vehicle can much more easily tip over side-  
ways than it can when moving forward or backward. Avoid driving  
straight up or down slopes that are too steep.  
D Avoid sharp turning maneuvers, especially at higher speeds.  
D Do not grip the inside or spokes of the steering wheel. A bad bump  
could jerk the wheel and injure your hands. Instead drive with your fin-  
gers and thumbs on the outside of the rim.  
D If driving through water, such as when crossing shallow streams, first  
check the depth of the water and the bottom of the stream bed for firm-  
– CONTINUED–  
7-35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ness and ensure that the bed of the stream is flat. Drive slowly and com-  
pletely through the stream. The water should be shallow enough that it  
does not reach the vehicle’s undercarriage. Water entering the engine air  
intake or the exhaust pipe or water splashing onto electrical parts may  
damage your vehicle and may cause it to stall. Never attempt to drive  
through rushing water; regardless of its depth, it can wash away the  
ground from under your tires, resulting in possible loss of traction and  
even vehicle rollover.  
D Always check your brakes for effectiveness immediately after driving  
in sand, mud or water. Do this by driving slowly and stepping on the  
brake pedal. Repeat that process several times to dry out the brake  
discs and brake pads.  
D Do not drive or park over or near flammable materials such as dry  
grass or fallen leaves, as they may burn easily. The exhaust system is  
very hot while engine is running and right after engine stops. This could  
create a fire hazard.  
D After driving through tall grass, mud, rock, sand, rivers, etc., check  
that there is no grass, bush, paper, rags, stones, sand, etc. adhering to  
or trapped on the underbody. Clear off any such matter from the under-  
body. If the vehicle is used with these materials trapped or adhering to  
the underbody, a mechanical breakdown or fire could occur.  
D Secure all cargo carried inside the vehicle and make certain that it is  
not piled higher than the seatbacks. During sudden stops or jolts, unse-  
cured cargo could be thrown around in the vehicle and cause injury. Do  
not pile heavy loads on the roof. Those loads raise the vehicle’s center of  
gravity and make it more prone to tip over.  
D If you must rock the vehicle to free it from sand or mud, depress the  
accelerator pedal slightly and move the selector lever back and forth be-  
tween “D” and “R” repeatedly. Do not race the engine. For the best pos-  
sible traction, avoid spinning the wheels when trying to free the vehicle.  
When the road surface is extremely slippery, you can obtain better trac-  
tion by starting the vehicle with the transmission in 2nd than 1st (both for  
MT and AT).  
D Never equip your vehicle with tires larger than those specified in this  
manual.  
D Frequent driving of an AWD vehicle under hard-driving conditions such  
7-36  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Starting and operating  
as rough roads or off roads will necessitate more frequent replacement of  
engine oil, brake fluid and transmission oil than that specified in the main-  
tenance schedule described in the Warranty and Maintenance Booklet.  
Remember that damage done to your Subaru while operating if off-road  
and not using common sense precautions such as those listed above is  
not eligible for warranty coverage.  
Winter driving  
HG0315  
J Operation during cold weather  
Carry some emergency equipment, such as tire chains, a window scrap-  
er, a bag of sand, flares, a small shovel, and jumper cables.  
Check the battery and cables. Cold temperatures reduce battery capac-  
ity. The battery must be in good condition to provide enough power for  
cold winter starts.  
Use an engine oil of proper grade and viscosity for cold weather. Heavy  
summer oil will cause harder starting.  
Keep the door locks from freezing by squirting them with deicer or glyc-  
erin.  
Forcing a frozen door open may damage or separate the rubber weather  
strips around the door. If the door is frozen, use hot water to melt the ice,  
and afterwards thoroughly wipe the water away.  
– CONTINUED–  
7-37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Use a windshield washer fluid that contains an antifreeze solution. Do not  
use engine antifreeze or other substitutes because they may damage the  
paint of the vehicle.  
B Before driving your vehicle  
Before entering the vehicle, remove any snow or ice from your shoes  
because that could make the pedals slippery and dangerous.  
While warming up the vehicle before driving, check that the accelera-  
tor pedal, brake pedal, and all other controls operate smoothly.  
Clear away ice and snow that has accumulated under the fenders to  
avoid making steering difficult. During severe winter driving, stop  
when and where it is safe to do so and check under the fenders peri-  
odically.  
B Parking in cold weather  
WARNING  
Snow can trap dangerous exhaust gases under your vehicle.  
Keep snow clear of the exhaust pipe and from around your  
vehicle if you park the vehicle in snow with the engine running.  
Do not use the parking brake when parking for long periods in cold  
weather since it could freeze in that position. Instead, observe the fol-  
lowing:  
1. Place the shift lever in “1” or “R” for manual transmission vehicles,  
and in “P” for automatic transmission vehicles.  
2. Use tire stops under the tires to prevent the vehicle from moving.  
When the vehicle is parked in snow or when it snows, raise the wiper  
blades off the glass to prevent damage to them.  
When the vehicle has been left parked after use on roads heavily cov-  
ered with snow, or has been left parked during a snowstorm, icing  
may develop on the brake system, which could cause poor braking  
action. Check for snow buildup or ice on the suspension, disc brakes  
and brake hoses underneath the vehicle.  
If there is caked snow or ice, remove it, being careful not to damage  
the disc brakes and brake hoses and ABS harness.  
7-38  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Starting and operating  
B Refueling in cold weather  
To help prevent moisture from forming in the fuel system and the risk  
of its freezing, use of an antifreeze additive in the fuel tank is recom-  
mended during cold weather.  
Use only additives that are specifically designed for this purpose.  
When an antifreeze additive is used, its effect lasts longer if the tank is  
refilled whenever the fuel level reaches half empty.  
If your SUBARU is not going to be used for an extended period, it is  
best to have the fuel tank filled to capacity.  
J Driving on snowy and icy roads  
WARNING  
Do not use the cruise control on slippery roads such as snowy or  
icy roads. This may cause loss of vehicle control.  
To prevent skidding and slipping, avoid sudden braking, abrupt accelera-  
tion, high-speed driving, and sharp turning when driving on snowy or icy  
roads.  
Always maintain ample distance between your vehicle and the vehicle  
ahead of you to avoid the need for sudden braking.  
Use the engine brake effectively to control the vehicle speed. (Shift into a  
lower gear when necessary.)  
Avoid locking the front wheels because that can lead to a loss of steering  
control. When braking with a vehicle not equipped with an Anti-Lock  
Brake System (ABS), press the brake pedal repeatedly at short intervals  
to prevent the wheels from locking. Then apply the brakes softly to bring  
the vehicle to a stop.  
An Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) enhances your vehicle’s braking per-  
formance on snowy and icy roads. Refer to ABS (Anti-Lock Brake Sys-  
tem) in this chapter for information on braking on slippery surfaces in  
ABS equipped vehicle.  
B Wiper operation when snowing  
Before driving in cold weather, make sure the wiper blades are not  
frozen to the windshield or rear window. If the wiper blades are frozen  
– CONTINUED–  
7-39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
to the windshield or rear window, use the defroster with the airflow  
control dial in the “ ” position and the temperature control dial  
turned fully to the right until the wiper blades are completely thawed  
out. To thaw out the rear wiper blade, use the rear window defogger.  
When driving in snow, if frozen snow starts to stick on the surface of  
the windshield despite wiper operation, use the defroster with the air-  
flow control dial in “  
” and the temperature control dial turned fully  
to the right. After the windshield gets warmed enough to melt the fro-  
zen snow on it, wash it away using the windshield washer.  
Snow stuck on the wiper arm prevents the wiper from working effec-  
tively. If snow is stuck on the wiper arm, pull off the road to a safe  
place, then remove it. If you stop the car at the side of the road, use  
the hazard warning flasher to alert other drivers.  
We recommend use of non-freezing type wiper blades during the sea-  
sons you could have snow falling and sub-zero temperature.  
J Snow tires  
WARNING  
D When replacing a tire, make sure you use only the same size,  
construction, brand, and load range as the original tires listed on  
the tire placard. Using other sizes or construction may result in  
severe mechanical damage to the drive train of your vehicle and  
may affect ride, handling, braking, speedometer/odometer cal-  
ibration, and clearance between the body and tires. It also may be  
dangerous and lead to loss of vehicle control.  
D Do not use a combination of radial, belted bias or bias tires  
since it may cause dangerous handling characteristics and lead  
to an accident.  
Your vehicle is equipped with “all season tires” which are designed to  
provide an adequate measure of traction, handling and braking perfor-  
mance in year-round driving. In winter, it may be possible to enhance  
performance through use of tires designed specifically for winter driving  
conditions.  
If you choose to install winter tires on your vehicle, be sure to use the  
7-40  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Starting and operating  
same tire size, construction, brand, and load range as the original tires.  
The recommended tire sizes and pressure are provided on the tire label,  
which can be found on the driver’s side door jamb under the latch.  
Remember to drive with care at all times regardless of the type of tires on  
your vehicle.  
J Tire chains  
CAUTION  
Tire chains cannot be fitted with P205/60R15 tires for OUTBACK  
and P205/55R16 tires for RS because of lack of clearance  
between the tire and body.  
Driving on snowy grades or icy roads may require the use of tire chains,  
in which case put the chains on the front wheels only. Use only SAE  
class S type chains that are of the correct size for your tires so as not to  
damage the vehicle body or suspension.  
When driving with tire chains, drive at speeds below 19 mph (30 km/h).  
When a temporary spare tire is on a front wheel, replace the temporary  
spare tire with the rear tire on the same side of the vehicle, and then fit  
chains on the front tires.  
Always use the utmost care when driving with tire chains — overconfi-  
dence because you are driving with tire chains could easily lead to a se-  
rious accident.  
J Rocking the vehicle  
If you must rock the vehicle to free it from snow, sand, or mud, depress  
the accelerator pedal slightly and move the selector lever back and forth  
between “D” and “R” repeatedly. Do not race the engine. For the best  
possible traction, avoid spinning the wheels when trying to free the ve-  
hicle.  
When the road surface is extremely slippery, you can obtain better trac-  
tion by starting the vehicle with the transmission in 2nd than 1st (both for  
MT and AT).  
Refer to the Automatic Transmission section in this chapter for informa-  
tion on holding the transmission in 2nd position.  
– CONTINUED–  
7-41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
J Corrosion protection  
Refer to the Corrosion Protection section (chapter 9).  
Loading your vehicle  
WARNING  
D Never allow passengers to ride on the folded rear seatback in  
the trunk or in the cargo area. Doing so may result in serious in-  
jury.  
D Never stack luggage or other cargo higher than the top of the  
seatback because it could tumble forward and injure passengers  
in the event of a sudden stop or accident. Keep luggage or cargo  
low, as close to the floor as possible.  
D When you carry something inside the vehicle, secure it when-  
ever you can to prevent it from being thrown around inside the  
vehicle during sudden stops, sharp turns or in an accident.  
D Do not pile heavy loads on the roof. These loads raise the  
vehicle’s center of gravity and make it more prone to tip over.  
D Secure skis and other lengthy items properly to prevent them  
from shooting forward and causing serious injury during a sud-  
den stop.  
D Never exceed the maximum load limit. If you do, some parts on  
your vehicle can break, or it can change the way your vehicle  
handles. This could result in loss of control and cause personal  
injury. Also, overloading can shorten the life of your vehicle.  
D Do not place anything on the rear shelf behind the rear seat-  
back (for sedan) or the extended luggage cover (for wagon). Such  
items could tumble forward in the event of a sudden stop or a  
collision. This could cause serious injury.  
CAUTION  
Do not carry spray cans, containers with flammable or corrosive  
liquids or any other dangerous items inside the vehicle.  
7-42  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Starting and operating  
J Vehicle capacity weight  
Tire information label  
HG0347  
HG0278  
The load capacity of your vehicle is determined by weight, not by avail-  
able cargo space. The maximum load you can carry in your vehicle is  
shown as the Vehicle Capacity Weight on the tire information label at-  
tached to the driver’s side door jamb. It includes the total weight of driver  
and all passengers and their belongings, any optional equipment such  
as a trailer hitch, roof rack or bike carrier, etc., and the tongue load of a  
trailer.  
J GVWR and GAWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating and Gross Axle  
Weight Rating)  
Certification plate  
HG0342  
The certification plate attached to the driver’s side door jamb shows  
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) and GAWR (Gross Axle Weight  
– CONTINUED–  
7-43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Rating).  
The GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) must never exceed the GVWR. GAW is  
the combined total of weight of the vehicle, fuel, driver, all passengers,  
luggage, any optional equipment and trailer tongue load. Therefore, the  
GVW changes depending on the situation. The GVWR equals Curb  
Weight (actual weight of your vehicle – including standard equipment,  
fluids, emergency tools and spare tire assembly) plus the vehicle capac-  
ity weight.  
In addition, the total weight applied to each axle (GAW) must never ex-  
ceed the GVWR. The front and rear GAWs can be adjusted by relocating  
luggage inside the vehicle.  
Even if the total weight of your luggage is lower than the vehicle capacity  
weight, either front or rear GAW may exceed the GAWR, depending on  
the distribution of the luggage.  
If you carry heavy loads in the vehicle, you should confirm that GVW and  
front and rear GAWs are within the GVWR and GAWR by putting your  
vehicle on a vehicle scale, found at a commercial weighing station.  
Do not use replacement tires with a lower load range than the originals  
because they may lower the GVWR and GAWR limitations. Replacement  
tires with a higher load range than the originals do not increase the  
GVWR and GAWR limitations.  
NOTE  
For better fuel economy, do not carry unneeded cargo.  
Trailer towing  
Your car is designed and intended to be used primarily as a passenger-  
carrying vehicle. Towing a trailer puts additional loads on your car’s en-  
gine, drive train, brakes, tires and suspension and has an adverse effect  
on fuel economy.  
If you do decide to tow a trailer, your safety and satisfaction depend  
upon proper use of correct equipment and cautious operation of your ve-  
hicle. Seek the advice of a professional trailer and/or hitch supplier to  
assist you in purchasing a hitch and other necessary towing equipment  
7-44  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Starting and operating  
appropriate for your vehicle. In addition, be sure to follow the instructions  
on correct installation and use provided by the trailer and other towing  
equipment manufacturers.  
SUBARU assumes no responsibility for injuries or vehicle damage that  
result from trailer towing equipment, or from any errors or omissions in  
the instructions accompanying such equipment or for your failure to fol-  
low the proper instructions.  
J Warranties and maintenance  
SUBARU warranties do not apply to vehicle damage or malfunction  
caused by trailer towing. If you use your vehicle to tow a trailer, more  
frequent maintenance will be required due to the additional load.  
Under no circumstances should a trailer be towed with a new vehicle or  
a vehicle with any new power train component (engine, transmission, dif-  
ferential, wheel bearings, etc.) for the first 1,000 miles (1,600 km) of driv-  
ing.  
J Maximum load limits  
CAUTION  
Never exceed the maximum load limits explained below. Exceed-  
ing the maximum load limits could cause personal injury and/or  
vehicle damage.  
The total trailer weight (trailer weight plus its cargo weight) with brakes  
must never exceed 1,500 lbs (681 kg).  
The Gross Vehicle Weight (i.e., the combined weight of vehicle, driver,  
passengers, luggage, trailer hitch, trailer tongue load and any other op-  
tional equipment installed on your vehicle) must never exceed the Gross  
Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR). GVWR is shown on the certification plate  
located on the left center pillar of your vehicle.  
The total weight applied to each axle must never exceed the Gross Axle  
Weight Rating (GAWR). The front and rear GAWR are also shown on the  
certification plate.  
The maximum trailer tongue load must never exceed 150 lbs. (68 kg).  
– CONTINUED–  
7-45  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The tongue load can be adjusted by proper distribution of the load in the  
trailer. Never load the trailer with more weight in the back than the front;  
approximately 60 percent of the trailer load should be in the front and  
approximately 40 percent in the rear. Also, distribute the load as evenly  
as possible on both the left and right sides.  
To check both GVWR and GAWR and to confirm that the total weight and  
weight distribution are within safe driving limits, you should have your ve-  
hicle and trailer weighed at a commercial weighing station.  
Be sure that all cargo is firmly secured to prevent a change in weight  
distribution while driving.  
J Trailer hitches  
WARNING  
Never drill the frame or under-body of your vehicle to install a  
commercial trailer hitch. If you do, dangerous exhaust gas, water  
or mud may enter into the passenger compartment through the  
drilled hole. Exhaust gas contains carbon monoxide, a colorless  
and odorless gas which is dangerous, or even lethal, if inhaled.  
Also, drilling the frame or under-body of your vehicle could cause  
deterioration of strength of your vehicle and cause corrosion  
around the drilled hole.  
CAUTION  
D Do not modify the vehicle exhaust system, brake system, or  
other system when installing a hitch or other trailer towing equip-  
ment.  
D Adequate size trailer brakes are required when the trailer and  
its cargo exceed 700 lbs (318 kg) total weight.  
Choose a proper hitch for your vehicle and trailer. SUBARU does not of-  
fer accessory trailer hitches. Consult with a professional hitch supplier to  
assist you in choosing an appropriate hitch for your vehicle. Be sure to  
follow all of the hitch manufacturer’s instructions for installation and use.  
7-46  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Starting and operating  
J Trailer lights  
CAUTION  
Direct splicing or other improper connection may damage your  
vehicle’s electrical system and cause a malfunction of your ve-  
hicle lighting system.  
Consult your authorized SUBARU dealer concerning the connection of  
wires for trailer lights. Check for correct operation of the turn signals and  
brake lights each time you hitch up.  
J Side mirrors  
After hitching a trailer to your vehicle, check that the standard side mir-  
rors provide a good rearward field of view without significant blind spots.  
If significant blind spots occur with the vehicle’s standard side mirrors,  
use towing mirrors that conform with Federal, state/province and/or other  
applicable regulations.  
J Tires  
WARNING  
Never tow a trailer when the temporary spare tire is used. The  
temporary spare tire is not designed to sustain the towing load.  
Use of the temporary spare tire when towing can result in failure  
of the spare tire and/or less stability of the vehicle and may lead  
to an accident.  
Make sure that all the tires on your vehicle are inflated to the pressure  
specified on the tire placard located on the left center pillar of your  
vehicle.  
– CONTINUED–  
7-47  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
HG0278  
Trailer tire condition, size, load rating and proper inflation pressure  
should be in accordance with the trailer and tire manufacturer’s specifi-  
cations.  
In the event your vehicle gets a flat tire when towing a trailer, ask a com-  
mercial road service to repair the flat tire.  
If you carry a regular size spare tire in your vehicle or trailer as a precau-  
tion against getting a flat tire, be sure that the spare tire is firmly secured.  
J Trailer towing tips  
When towing a trailer, steering, stability, stopping distance and braking  
performance will vary from normal operation. For safety’s sake, you  
should employ extra caution when towing a trailer and you should never  
speed.  
You should also keep the following tips in mind:  
Sufficient time should be taken to learn the “feel” of the vehicle/trailer  
combination before starting out on a trip. In an area free of traffic, prac-  
tice turning, stopping and backing up.  
You should allow for considerably more stopping distance when towing a  
trailer. Avoid sudden braking because it may result in skidding or jack-  
knifing and loss of control.  
Avoid abrupt starts and sudden accelerations. If your vehicle has a  
manual transmission, always start out in 1st gear and release the clutch  
7-48  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Starting and operating  
at moderate engine rpm.  
Avoid uneven steering, sharp turns and rapid lane changes.  
Slow down before turning. Make a longer than normal turning radius be-  
cause the trailer wheels will be closer than the vehicle wheels to the in-  
side of the turn. In a tight turn, the trailer could hit your vehicle.  
Crosswinds will adversely affect the handling of your vehicle and trailer,  
causing sway. Crosswinds can be due to weather conditions or the  
passing of large trucks or buses. If swaying occurs, firmly grip the steer-  
ing wheel and immediately slow down gradually.  
When passing other vehicles, considerable distance is required because  
of the added weight and length caused by attaching a trailer to your ve-  
hicle.  
Before going down a steep hill, slow down and shift into low gear in or-  
der to utilize the engine braking effect and prevent overheating of your  
vehicle’s brakes. Do not make sudden downshifts.  
When going uphill on hot days, turn off your air conditioner to reduce the  
possibility of engine overheating caused by the added load of the trailer.  
Pay attention to your water temperature gauge.  
If your vehicle has an automatic transmission, avoid using the accelera-  
tor pedal to stay stationary on an uphill slope instead of using the park-  
ing brake or foot brake. This may cause the transmission fluid to over-  
heat.  
Always block the wheels under both vehicle and trailer when parking.  
Apply the parking brake firmly. You should not park on a hill or slope. But  
if parking on a hill or slope cannot be avoided, you should take the fol-  
lowing steps:  
1. Apply the brakes and hold the pedal down.  
2. Have someone place wheel blocks under both the vehicle and trailer  
wheels.  
3. When the wheel blocks are in place, release the regular brakes slowly  
until the blocks absorb the load.  
4. Apply the regular brakes and then apply the parking brake; slowly re-  
– CONTINUED–  
7-49  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
lease the regular brakes.  
5. Shift into 1st or reverse gear (manual transmission) or “P” (automatic  
transmission) and shut off the engine.  
If the ABS warning light illuminates while the vehicle is in motion, stop  
towing the trailer and have repairs carried out immediately by the nearest  
SUBARU dealer.  
7-50  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
In case of emergency  
Hazard warning flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
8-2  
Engine overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
If steam is coming from the engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
If no steam is coming from the engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
8-2  
8-2  
8-3  
Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
How to jump start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
8-4  
8-5  
Flat tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Changing a flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Temporary spare tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Tire changing tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
8-6  
8-6  
8-11  
8-13  
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14  
Transporting your vehicle using a flat-bed truck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
8-14  
Towing with the front wheels raised off the ground . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15  
Towing with all wheels on the ground . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Towing eyelets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
8-16  
8-17  
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Hazard warning flasher  
HS0053  
Day or night, if your vehicle becomes a traffic hazard, use the hazard  
warning flasher. Avoid stopping on the road. It is best to safely pull off  
the road if a problem occurs. The hazard warning flasher can be acti-  
vated regardless of the ignition switch position.  
Turn on the hazard warning by pushing the hazard warning flasher  
switch. Turn it off by pushing the switch again.  
Engine overheating  
WARNING  
Never attempt to remove the radiator cap until the engine has  
been shut off and has fully cooled down. When the engine is hot,  
the coolant is under pressure. Removing the cap while the engine  
is still hot could release a spray of boiling hot coolant, which  
could burn you very seriously.  
If the engine overheats, safely pull off the road and stop the vehicle in a  
safe place.  
J If steam is coming from the engine compartment  
Turn the engine off and get everyone away from the vehicle until it cools  
down.  
8-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
In case of emergency  
J If no steam is coming from the engine compartment  
1. Keep the engine running at idling speed.  
2. Open the hood to ventilate the engine compartment.  
Confirm that the cooling fan is turning. If the fan is not turning, immedi-  
ately turn the engine off and contact your authorized SUBARU dealer for  
repair.  
3. After the engine coolant temperature has dropped, turn off the en-  
gine.  
If the temperature gauge stays at the overheated zone, turn the engine  
off.  
4. After the engine has fully cooled down, check the coolant level in the  
reserve tank.  
If the coolant level is below the “MIN” mark, add coolant up to the “MAX”  
mark.  
5. If there is no coolant in the reserve tank, add coolant to the reserve  
tank. Then remove the radiator cap and fill the radiator with coolant.  
If you remove the radiator cap from a hot radiator, first wrap a thick cloth  
around the radiator cap, then turn the cap counterclockwise slowly with-  
out pressing down until it stops. Release the pressure from the radiator.  
After the pressure has been fully released, remove the cap by pressing  
down and turning it.  
8-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Jump starting  
WARNING  
D Battery fluid is SULFURIC ACID. Do not let it come in contact  
with the eyes, skin, clothing or the vehicle.  
If battery fluid gets on you, thoroughly flush the exposed area  
with water immediately. Get medical help if the fluid has entered  
your eyes.  
If battery fluid is accidentally swallowed, immediately drink a  
large amount of milk or water, and obtain immediate medical  
help.  
Keep everyone including children away from the battery.  
D The gas generated by a battery explodes if a flame or spark is  
brought near it. Do not smoke or light a match while jump start-  
ing.  
D Never attempt jump starting if the discharged battery is frozen.  
It could cause the battery to burst or explode.  
D Whenever working on or around a battery, always wear suit-  
able eye protectors, and remove metal objects such as rings,  
bands or other metal jewelry.  
D Be sure the jumper cables and clamps on them do not have  
loose or missing insulation.  
Do not jump start unless cables in suitable condition are avail-  
able.  
D A running engine can be dangerous. Keep your fingers, hands,  
clothing, hair and tools away from the cooling fan, belts and any  
other moving engine parts. Removing rings, watches and ties is  
advisable.  
CAUTION  
The battery used for boosting must be 12V. Do not jump start un-  
less you are sure that the booster battery is correct.  
8-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
In case of emergency  
When your vehicle does not start due to a run down (discharged) bat-  
tery, the vehicle may be jump started by connecting your battery to  
another battery (called the booster battery) with jumper cables.  
Jump starting is dangerous if it done incorrectly. If you are unsure about  
the proper procedure for jump starting, consult a competent mechanic.  
J How to jump start  
1. Make sure the booster battery is 12 volts and the negative terminal is  
grounded.  
2. If the booster battery is in another vehicle, do not let the two vehicles  
touch.  
3. Turn off all unnecessary lights and accessories.  
4. Connect the jumper cables exactly in the sequence illustrated.  
Engine lifting bracket  
HG0103  
1 Connect one jumper cable to the positive (+) terminal on the dis-  
charged battery.  
2 Connect the other end of the jumper cable to the positive (+) termi-  
nal of the booster battery.  
3 Connect one end of the other cable to the negative (–) terminal of  
the booster battery.  
4 Connect the other end of the cable to the engine lifting bracket.  
Make sure that the cables are not near any moving parts and that the  
cable clamps are not in contact with any other metal.  
5. Start the engine of the vehicle with the booster battery and run it at  
– CONTINUED –  
8-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
moderate speed. Then start the engine of the vehicle that has the dis-  
charged battery.  
6. When finished, carefully disconnect the cables in exactly the reverse  
order.  
Flat tires  
WARNING  
D Do not jack up the vehicle on an incline or a loose road sur-  
face. The jack can come out of the jacking point or sink into the  
ground and this can result in a severe accident.  
D Use only the jack provided with your vehicle. The jack sup-  
plied with the vehicle is designed only for changing a tire. Never  
get under the vehicle while supporting the vehicle with this jack.  
D Always turn the engine off before raising the flat tire off the  
ground using the jack. Never swing or push the vehicle sup-  
ported with the jack. The jack can come out of the jacking point  
due to a jolt and this can result in a severe accident.  
If you have a flat tire while driving, never brake suddenly; keep driving  
straight ahead while gradually reducing speed. Then slowly pull off the  
road to a safe place.  
J Changing a flat tire  
WARNING  
D Do not use oil or grease on the wheel studs or nuts when the  
spare tire is installed. This could cause the nuts to become loose  
and lead to an accident.  
D Never place a tire or tire changing tools in the passenger  
compartment after changing wheels. In a sudden stop or colli-  
sions, loose equipment could strike occupants and cause injury.  
Store the tire and all tools in the proper place.  
8-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
In case of emergency  
1. Park on a hard, level surface, whenever possible, then stop the en-  
gine.  
2. Set the parking brake securely and shift a manual transmission ve-  
hicle in reverse or an automatic transmission vehicle in the “P” (Park)  
position.  
3. Turn on the hazard warning flasher and have everyone get out of the  
vehicle.  
4. Put wheel blocks at the front and rear of the tire diagonally opposite  
the flat tire.  
OM-H0167  
5. Take out the spare tire, jack, and wheel nut wrench. See Tire changing  
tools in this chapter.  
6. Remove the wheel covers.  
Locking type wheel cover: Grasp the wheel cover with both hands by  
the spokes and twist sharply in a counterclockwise direction until you  
feel the detente release. Now the wheel cover is free from the retention  
ring.  
Regular type wheel cover: Insert the wheel cover remover into the  
notch provided in the wheel cover, and pry it off.  
– CONTINUED –  
8-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Locking type wheel cover  
HG0105  
12BB  
7. Loosen the wheel nuts using the wheel nut wrench but do not remove  
the nuts.  
-H0376  
8. Place the jack under the side sill at the front or rear jack-up point clos-  
est to the flat tire.  
Turn the jackscrew by hand until the jack head engages firmly into the  
jack-up point.  
8-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
In case of emergency  
OM-H0170  
9. Insert the jack handle into the jackscrew, and turn the handle clock-  
wise until the tire clears the ground. Do not raise the vehicle higher than  
necessary.  
OM-H0171  
10. Remove the wheel nuts and the flat tire.  
11. Before putting the spare tire on, clean the mounting surface of the  
wheel and hub with a cloth.  
– CONTINUED –  
8-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
OM-H0172  
HG0104  
12. Put on the spare tire. Replace the wheel nuts. Tighten them by hand.  
13. Turn the jack handle counterclockwise to lower the vehicle.  
14. Use the wheel nut wrench to securely tighten the wheel nuts to the  
specified torque, following the tightening order in the illustration.  
OM-H0173  
The torque for tightening the nuts is 58 to 72 ft-lb (78 to 98 N-m, 8 to 10  
kg-m). This torque is equivalent to applying about 88 to 110 lbs (40 to 50  
kg) at the top of the wheel nut wrench. Never use your foot on the wheel  
nut wrench or a pipe extension on the wrench because you may exceed  
the specified torque. Have the wheel nut torque checked at a nearest  
automotive service facility.  
15. Store the flat tire in the compact spare tire compartment.  
When storing a conventional tire, put the spacer upside down and tight-  
8-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
In case of emergency  
en the attaching bolt firmly.  
Attaching bolt  
Flat tire  
Spacer  
HS0153  
Also store the jack and wheel nut wrench in their storage locations. See  
Tire changing tools in this section.  
J Temporary spare tire  
WARNING  
Never tow a trailer when the temporary spare tire is used. The  
temporary spare tire is not designed to sustain the towing load.  
Use of the temporary spare tire when towing can result in failure  
of the spare tire and/or less stability of the vehicle and may lead  
to an accident.  
CAUTION  
Never use any temporary spare tire other than the original. Using  
other sizes may result in severe mechanical damage to the drive  
train of your vehicle.  
Your vehicle has a temporary spare tire. This tire is smaller and lighter  
than a conventional tire and is designed for emergency use only. Re-  
move the temporary spare tire and re-install the conventional tire as soon  
as possible because the spare tire is designed only for temporary use.  
Check the inflation pressure of the temporary spare tire at 60 psi (420  
– CONTINUED –  
8-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2
kPa, 4.2 kg/cm ) periodically to keep the tire ready for use.  
When using the temporary spare tire, note the following:  
D Do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h).  
D Do not put a tire chain on the temporary spare tire. Because of the  
smaller tire size, a tire chain will not fit properly .  
D Do not use two or more temporary spare tires at the same time.  
D Do not drive over obstacles. This tire has a smaller diameter, so  
road clearance is reduced.  
D When the wear indicator appears on the tread, replace the tire.  
Indicator  
location mark  
Spare  
fuse  
FWD socket  
Tread wear  
indicator bar  
HG0106  
HG0350  
HG0349  
D (If your vehicle is AWD with automatic transmission) Before driving  
your vehicle with the temporary spare tire, put a spare fuse inside the  
FWD connector in the main fuse box located in the engine compart-  
ment and confirm that the Front-wheel drive warning light comes on.  
The all wheel drive capability of the vehicle has now deactivated. Af-  
8-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
In case of emergency  
ter re-installing the conventional tire, remove the spare fuse from the  
FWD connector in order to reactivate all wheel drive.  
J Tire changing tools  
B Spare tire  
HG0034  
OM-H0175  
The spare tire is stored under the floor of the trunk or the luggage  
compartment. To remove the spare tire, first remove the spare tire  
cover, turn the attaching bolt counterclockwise, then take the spare  
tire out.  
B Jack and jack handle  
OM-H0176  
HG0107  
HG0193  
The jack is stored on the left side of the trunk or luggage compart-  
ment.  
– CONTINUED –  
8-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
To take out the jack, first pull the tab on the trim cover down to open  
the cover, turn the jackscrew counterclockwise to loosen it, then re-  
move the jack.  
The jack handle is stored under the spare tire cover.  
Towing  
If towing is necessary, it is best done by your SUBARU dealer or a com-  
mercial towing service. Observe the following procedures for safety.  
J Transporting your vehicle using a flat-bed truck  
HG0108  
This is the best way to transport your vehicle. Use the following proce-  
dures to ensure safe transportation.  
1. Shift the selector lever into the “P” position for automatic transmission  
vehicles or “1st” for manual transmission vehicles.  
2. Pull up the parking brake lever firmly.  
3. Secure the vehicle onto the carrier properly with safety chains. Each  
of safety chain should be equally tightened and care must be taken not  
to pull the chains so tightly that the suspension bottoms out.  
8-14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
In case of emergency  
J Towing with the front wheels raised off the ground  
WARNING  
Never tow manual transmission AWD vehicles with the front  
wheels raised off the ground while the rear wheels are on the  
ground. This will cause the vehicle to spin away due to the opera-  
tion or deterioration of the viscous coupling.  
CAUTION  
When transmission failure occurs, transport your vehicle on a  
flat-bed truck.  
HG0109  
1. Check the transmission and differential oil levels and add oil to bring it  
to the upper level if necessary.  
2. Release the parking brake and put the transmission in neutral.  
3. The ignition switch should be in the “ACC” position while the vehicle  
is being towed.  
4. Take up slack in the towline slowly to prevent damage to the vehicle.  
– CONTINUED –  
8-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
J Towing with all wheels on the ground  
WARNING  
D Never turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK” position while the  
vehicle is being towed because the steering wheel and the direc-  
tion of the wheels will be locked.  
D Remember that the brake booster and power steering do not  
function when the engine is not running. Because the engine is  
turned off, it will take greater effort to operate the brake pedal and  
steering wheel.  
CAUTION  
D When transmission failure occurs, transport your vehicle on a  
flat-bed truck.  
D For AWD vehicles or FWD vehicles with automatic transmis-  
sion, the traveling speed must be limited to less than 20 mph (30  
km/h) and the traveling distance to less than 31 miles (50 km). For  
greater speeds and distances, transport your vehicle on a flat-  
bed truck.  
D For OUTBACK models, be sure to use a flexible cable for tow-  
ing purpose and wrap the towing cable with cloth to prevent dam-  
age to the bumper.  
OM-H0180  
8-16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
In case of emergency  
We do not recommend this method of towing. Use this method only when  
towing service by a SUBARU dealer or a commercial towing service is  
not available.  
1. Check the transmission and differential oil levels and add oil to bring it  
to the upper level if necessary.  
2. Release the parking brake and put the transmission in neutral.  
3. The ignition switch should be in the “ACC” position while the vehicle  
is being towed.  
4. Take up slack in the towline slowly to prevent damage to the vehicle.  
J Towing eyelets  
CAUTION  
D Never use the tie-down eyelet closest to the muffler under the  
vehicle for towing purposes.  
D Do not apply excessive lateral load to the towing eyelets.  
Towing eyelets  
Towing eyelet  
Towing eyelet  
HG0110  
HG0197  
– CONTINUED –  
8-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Never use tie-down eyelet  
for towing purposes.  
HG0111  
The towing eyelets should be used only in an emergency (e.g., to free a  
stuck vehicle from mud, sand or snow).  
8-18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appearance care  
Exterior care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Washing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Waxing and polishing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
9-2  
9-2  
9-3  
Corrosion protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Most common causes of corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
To help prevent corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
9-4  
9-4  
9-4  
Cleaning aluminum wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
9-5  
Cleaning the interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Seat fabric . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Synthetic leather upholstery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
9-6  
9-6  
9-6  
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Exterior care  
J Washing  
CAUTION  
D When washing the vehicle, the brakes may get wet. As a result,  
the brake stopping distance will be longer. To dry the brakes,  
drive the vehicle at a safe speed while lightly pressing the brake  
pedal to heat up the brakes.  
D Do not wash the engine compartment. If water enters electrical  
parts or the power steering fluid reservoir, it will cause engine  
trouble or faulty power steering respectively.  
The best way to preserve your vehicle’s beauty is frequent washing.  
Wash the vehicle at least once a month to avoid contamination by road  
grime.  
Wash dirt off with a wet sponge and plenty of lukewarm or cold water. Do  
not wash the vehicle with hot water and in direct sunlight.  
Salt, chemicals, insects, tar, soot and bird droppings should be washed  
off by using a light detergent, as required. If you use a light detergent,  
make certain that it is a neutral detergent. Do not use strong soap or  
chemical detergents. All cleaning agents should be promptly flushed  
from the surface and not allowed to dry there. Rinse the vehicle thor-  
oughly with plenty of lukewarm water. Wipe the remaining water off with a  
chamois or soft cloth.  
NOTE  
When having your vehicle washed in an automatic car wash, make sure  
beforehand that the car wash is of suitable type. If the vehicle is  
equipped with a rear spoiler, it may be damaged by the brush, etc.  
B Washing the underbody  
Chemicals, salts, and gravel used for deicing road surfaces are ex-  
tremely corrosive, accelerating the corrosion of underbody compo-  
nents, such as the exhaust system, fuel and brake lines, brake  
cables, floor pan and fenders, and suspension.  
9-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appearance care  
Thoroughly flush the underbody and inside of the fenders with luke-  
warm or cold water at frequent intervals to reduce the harmful effects  
of such agents.  
B Using a warm water washer  
D Keep a good distance of 12 inches (30 cm) or more between the  
washer nozzle and the vehicle.  
D Do not wash the same area continuously.  
D If a stain will not come out easily, wash by hand. Some warm water  
washers are of the high temperature, high pressure type and they can  
damage or deform the resin parts such as mouldings, or cause water  
to leak into the vehicle.  
J Waxing and polishing  
Always wash and dry the vehicle before waxing and polishing.  
Use a good quality polish and wax and apply them according to the  
manufacturer’s instructions. Wax or polish when the painted surface is  
cool.  
Be sure to polish and wax the chrome trim, as well as the painted sur-  
faces. Loss of wax on a painted surface leads to loss of the original lus-  
ter and also quickens the deterioration of the surface. It is recommended  
that a coat of wax be applied at least once a month, or whenever the  
surface no longer repels water.  
If the appearance of the paint has diminished to the point where the lus-  
ter or tone cannot be recovered, lightly polish the surface with a fine-  
grained compound. Never polish just the affected area, but include the  
surrounding area as well. Always polish in only one direction. A No. 2000  
grain compound is recommended. Never use a coarse-grained com-  
pound. Coarser grained compounds have a smaller grain-size number  
and could damage the paint. After polishing with a compound, coat with  
wax to restore the original luster. Frequent polishing with a compound or  
an incorrect polishing technique will result in removing the paint layer  
and exposing the undercoat. When in doubt, it is always best to contact  
your SUBARU dealer or an auto paint specialist.  
9-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Corrosion protection  
Your SUBARU has been designed and built to resist corrosion. Special  
materials and protective finishes have been used on most parts of the  
vehicle to help maintain fine appearance, strength, and reliable opera-  
tion.  
J Most common causes of corrosion  
The most common causes of corrosion are:  
1. The accumulation of moisture retaining dirt and debris in body panel  
sections, cavities, and other areas.  
2. Damage to paint and other protective coatings caused by gravel and  
stone chips or minor accidents.  
Corrosion is accelerated on the vehicle when:  
1. It is exposed to road salt or dust control chemicals, or used in coastal  
areas where there is more salt in the air, or in areas where there is con-  
siderable industrial pollution.  
2. It is driven in areas of high humidity, especially when temperatures  
range just above freezing.  
3. Dampness in certain parts of the vehicle remains for a long time, even  
though other parts of the vehicle may be dry.  
4. High temperatures will cause corrosion to parts of the vehicle which  
cannot dry quickly due to lack of proper ventilation.  
J To help prevent corrosion  
Wash the vehicle frequently. If you drive on salted roads in the winter or if  
you live in a coastal area, you should flush the underbody with fresh wa-  
ter frequently.  
After the winter has ended, it is recommended that the underbody be  
given a very thorough washing.  
Before the beginning of winter, check the condition of underbody com-  
ponents, such as the exhaust system, fuel and brake lines, brake cables,  
suspension, steering system, floor pan, and fenders. If any of them are  
found to be rusted, they should be given an appropriate rust prevention  
treatment or should be replaced. Contact your SUBARU dealer to per-  
9-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appearance care  
form this kind of maintenance and treatment if you need assistance.  
Repair chips and scratches in the paint as soon as you find them.  
Check the interior of the vehicle for water and dirt accumulation under  
the floor mats because that could cause corrosion. Occasionally check  
under the mats to make sure the area is dry.  
Keep your garage dry. Do not park your vehicle in a damp, poorly venti-  
lated garage. In such a garage, corrosion can be caused by dampness.  
If you wash the vehicle in the garage or put the vehicle into the garage  
when wet or covered with snow, that can cause dampness.  
If your vehicle is operated in cold weather and/or in areas where road  
salts and other corrosive materials are used, the door hinges and locks,  
trunk lid lock, and hood latch should be inspected and lubricated peri-  
odically.  
Cleaning aluminum wheels  
D Promptly wipe the aluminum wheels clean of any kind of grime or  
agent. If dirt is left on too long, it may be difficult to clean off.  
D Do not use soap containing grit to clean the wheels. Be sure to use a  
neutral cleaning agent, and later rinse thoroughly with water. Do not  
clean the wheels with a stiff brush or expose them to a high-speed wash-  
ing device.  
D Clean the vehicle (including the aluminum wheels) with water as soon  
as possible when it has been splashed with sea water, exposed to sea  
breezes, or driven on roads treated with salt or other agents.  
9-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Cleaning the interior  
Use a vacuum cleaner to get rid of the dust and dirt. Wipe the vinyl areas  
with a clean, damp cloth.  
J Seat fabric  
Remove loose dirt, dust or debris with a vacuum cleaner. If the dirt is  
caked on the fabric or hard to remove with a vacuum cleaner, use a soft  
blush then vacuum it.  
Wipe the fabric surface with a tightly wrung cloth and dry the seat fabric  
thoroughly. If the fabric is still dirty, wipe using a solution of mild soap  
and lukewarm water then dry thoroughly.  
If the stain does not come out, try a commercially-available fabric  
cleaner. Use the cleaner on a hidden place and make sure it does not  
affect the fabric adversely. Use the cleaner according to its instruction.  
J Synthetic leather upholstery  
The synthetic leather material used on the SUBARU may be cleaned us-  
ing mild soap or detergent and water, after first vacuuming or brushing  
away loose dirt. Allow the soap to soak in for a few minutes and wipe off  
with a clean, damp cloth. Commercial foam-type cleaners suitable for  
synthetic leather materials may be used when necessary.  
NOTE  
Strong cleaning agents such as solvents, paint thinners, window cleaner  
or gasoline must never be used on leather or synthetic interior materials.  
9-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and service  
Maintenance precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3  
Before checking or servicing in the engine compartment . . . . . . . 10-4  
When you do the checking or servicing in the engine  
compartment while the engine is running . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
10-4  
Engine compartment overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5  
Engine, transmission, and differential gear oil leaks . . . . . . . . . 10-7  
Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8  
Checking the oil level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Changing the oil and oil filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
10-8  
10-9  
Recommended grade and viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-11  
Recommended grade and viscosity under severe driving  
conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12  
Cooling system, hoses and connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12  
Engine coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13  
Checking the coolant level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13  
Changing the coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-15  
Air cleaner element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-17  
Replacing the air cleaner element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-18  
Spark plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-19  
Replacing the spark plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-19  
Recommended spark plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-20  
Drive belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-20  
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-20  
Manual transmission oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21  
Checking the oil level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21  
Recommended grade and viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21  
Automatic transmission fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-22  
Checking the fluid level when the fluid is hot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23  
Checking the fluid level when the fluid is cold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23  
Recommended fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23  
10  
Front differential gear oil (Automatic transmission) . . . . . . . . . 10-24  
Checking the oil level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24  
Recommended grade and viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24  
Rear differential gear oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25  
Checking the oil level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25  
Recommended grade and viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26  
Power steering fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27  
Checking the fluid level when the fluid is hot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27  
Checking the fluid level when the fluid is cold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28  
Recommended fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29  
Checking the fluid level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29  
Recommended brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30  
Clutch fluid (2.5 liter MT models) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30  
Recommended clutch fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31  
Brake booster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31  
Checking brake booster operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31  
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-32  
Checking the fluid level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-33  
Windshield washer fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-33  
Replacement of windshield wiper blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-34  
Brake pedal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-37  
Checking the brake pedal free play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-37  
Checking the brake pedal reserve distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-37  
Clutch pedal (Manual transmission) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-38  
Checking the clutch function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-38  
Checking the clutch pedal free play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-38  
Replacement of brake pad wear and lining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-39  
Audible brake pad wear indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-39  
Breaking-in of new brake pads and linings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-39  
Parking brake stroke . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-40  
Tires and wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-41  
Inspection and rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-41  
Wheel covers (Locking type wheel cover) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-43  
Wheel covers (Regular type wheel covers) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-45  
Aluminum wheels (if equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-46  
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-46  
Replacing a fuse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-47  
Main fuse and fusible link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-49  
Installation of accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-50  
Replacing bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-51  
Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-51  
Fog light (if equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-52  
Parking light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-54  
Front turn signal light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-55  
Side turn signal light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-56  
Rear combination lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-57  
License plate light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-59  
Interior light, spot light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-59  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and service  
Maintenance precautions  
When maintenance and service are required, it is recommended that all  
work be done by an authorized SUBARU dealer.  
If you perform maintenance and service by yourself, you should familiar-  
ize yourself with the information provided in this section on general main-  
tenance and service for your SUBARU.  
Incorrect or incomplete service could cause improper or unsafe vehicle  
operation. Any problems caused by improper maintenance and service  
performed by you are not eligible for warranty coverage.  
WARNING  
D Testing of a Full-Time All-Wheel Drive vehicle must NEVER be  
performed on a single two-wheel dynamometer or similar appara-  
tus nor should you install FWD fuse in the engine compartment.  
Attempting to do so will result in transmission damage and in  
uncontrolled vehicle movement and may cause an accident or  
injuries to persons nearby.  
D Always select a safe area when performing maintenance on  
your vehicle.  
D Always be very careful to avoid injury when working on the ve-  
hicle. Remember that some of the materials in the vehicle may be  
hazardous if improperly used or handled, for example, battery  
acid.  
D Your vehicle should only be serviced by persons fully compe-  
tent to do so. Serious personal injury may result to persons not  
experienced in servicing vehicles.  
D Always use the proper tools and make certain that they are  
well maintained.  
D Never get under the vehicle supported only by jack. Always  
use a safety stands to support the vehicle.  
D Never keep the engine running in a poorly ventilated area,  
such as a garage or other closed areas.  
D Do not smoke or allow open flames around the fuel or battery.  
This will cause a fire.  
– CONTINUED –  
10-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
D Because the fuel system is under pressure, replacement of the  
fuel filter should be performed only by your SUBARU dealer.  
D The SRS AIRBAG has no user-serviceable parts. Tampering  
with or disconnecting the system’s wiring could result in acci-  
dental inflation of the airbag or could make the system inopera-  
tive, which may result in serious injury. The wiring harnesses of  
the SRS AIRBAG system are covered with yellow insulation and  
the connectors of the system are yellow, for easy identification.  
Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the  
SRS AIRBAG system. For required servicing of the SRS AIRBAG,  
see your nearest SUBARU dealer.  
J Before checking or servicing in the engine compartment  
D Always stop the engine and set the parking brake firmly to pre-  
vent the vehicle from moving.  
D Always let the engine cool down. Engine parts become very  
hot when the engine is running and remain hot for some time af-  
ter the engine is stopped.  
D Do not spill engine oil, engine coolant, brake fluid or any other  
fluid on hot engine components. This may cause a fire.  
D Always remove the key from the ignition switch. When the  
ignition switch is in the “ON” position, the cooling fan may oper-  
ate suddenly even when the engine is stopped.  
J When you do the checking or servicing in the engine compart-  
ment while the engine is running  
D A running engine can be dangerous. Keep your fingers, hands,  
clothing, hair and tools away from the cooling fan, belts and any  
other moving engine parts. Removing rings, watches and ties is  
advisable.  
10-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and service  
Engine compartment overview  
B California specification vehicles  
HGA014BB  
1 Manual transmission oil level  
gauge (MT) (page 10-21) or  
Differential gear oil level  
gauge (AT) (page 10-24)  
2 Air cleaner element  
(page 10-17)  
7 Fuse box (page 10-46)  
8 Battery (page 10-32)  
9 Engine oil filler cap  
(page 10-8)  
Q Engine coolant reservoir  
(page 10-13)  
3 Automatic transmission fluid  
level gauge (page 10-22)  
4 Brake fluid reservoir  
(page 10-29)  
W Engine oil level gauge  
(page 10-8)  
E Power steering fluid reservoir  
(page 10-27)  
5 Fuel filter  
R Radiator cap (page 10-13)  
6 Windshield washer tank  
(page 10-33)  
– CONTINUED –  
10-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
B Except California specification vehicles  
HGA015BB  
1 Manual transmission oil level  
gauge (MT) (page 10-21) or  
Differential gear oil level  
gauge (AT) (page 10-24)  
2 Clutch fluid reservoir (page10-30)  
3 Automatic transmission fluid  
level gauge (page 10-22)  
4 Brake fluid reservoir  
(page 10-29)  
8 Battery (page 10-32)  
9 Engine oil filler cap  
(page 10-8)  
Q Engine coolant reservoir  
(page 10-13)  
W Engine oil level gauge  
(page10-8)  
E Power steering fluid reservoir  
(page 10-27)  
5 Fuel filter  
6 Windshield washer tank  
(page 10-33)  
R Radiator cap (page 10-13)  
T Air cleaner element  
(page 10-17)  
7 Fuse box (page 10-46)  
10-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and service  
Engine, transmission, and differential gear oil  
leaks  
Differential  
OM-H0187  
Engine  
Transmission  
Inspect the following for oil leaks:  
Oil pan mating area  
Oil filter mating area  
Mating area between the engine and transmission  
Around the rear differential case cover (AWD vehicles only)  
Each drain plug and filler plug  
If you find any leaks, contact with your SUBARU dealer.  
10-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Engine oil  
WARNING  
Never let engine oil contact your eyes because engine oil can be  
harmful to your eyes. If engine oil gets in your eyes, immediately  
flush them thoroughly with clean water. For safety, when perform-  
ing this work, wearing eye protection is advisable.  
J Checking the oil level  
Check the engine oil level at each fuel stop.  
Notch  
Upper  
level  
Lower  
level  
HG0351  
9  
1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and stop the engine.  
2. Pull out the dipstick, wipe it clean, and insert it again.  
3. Be sure the dipstick is correctly inserted until it stops with the graphic  
symbol on its top appearing as shown in the illustration.  
4. Pull out the dipstick again and check the oil level on it. If it is below  
the lower level, add oil to bring the level up to the upper level.  
CAUTION  
Use only engine oil with the recommended grade and viscosity.  
If you check the oil level just after stopping the engine, wait a few min-  
utes for the oil to drain back into the oil pan before checking the level.  
Just after driving or while the engine is warm, the engine oil level reading  
10-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and service  
may be in a range between the upper level and the notch mark. This is  
caused by thermal expansion of the engine oil.  
To prevent overfilling the engine oil, do not add any additional oil above  
the upper level when the engine is cold.  
J Changing the oil and oil filter  
Change the oil and oil filter according to the maintenance schedule in  
the warranty and maintenance booklet.  
The engine oil and oil filter must be changed more frequently than listed  
in the maintenance schedule when driving on dusty roads, when short  
trips are frequently made, when towing a trailer or when driving in ex-  
tremely cold whether.  
1. Warm up the engine by letting the engine idle for about 10 minutes to  
ease draining the engine oil.  
2. Park the vehicle on a level surface and stop the engine.  
3. Remove the oil filler cap.  
Drain plug  
190  
4. Drain out the engine oil by removing the drain plug while the engine is  
still warm. The used oil should be drained into an appropriate container  
and disposed of properly.  
WARNING  
Be careful not to burn yourself with hot engine oil.  
– CONTINUED –  
10-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5. Wipe the seating surface of the drain plug with a clean cloth and  
tighten it securely with a new sealing washer after the oil has completely  
drained out.  
Oil filter  
Sealing washer  
Drain plug  
OM-H0191  
6. Remove the oil filter with an oil filter wrench.  
7. Before installing a new oil filter, apply a thin coat of engine oil to the  
seal.  
8. Clean the rubber seal seating area of the lower crank case and install  
the oil filter by hand turning. Be careful not to twist or damage the seal.  
9. Tighten it approximately two-thirds of a turn after the seal makes con-  
tact with underside of the crank case.  
CAUTION  
Never over tighten the oil filter because that can result in an oil  
leak.  
10. Pour the specified amount of engine oil through the filler neck.  
Oil capacity: 4.2 US qt (4.0 liters, 3.5 Imp qt)  
11. Start the engine and make sure that no oil leaks appear around the  
filter’s rubber seal.  
12. Run the engine until it reaches the normal operating temperature.  
Then stop the engine and wait a few minutes to allow the oil drain back.  
Check the oil level again and if necessary, add more engine oil.  
10-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and service  
J Recommended grade and viscosity  
CAUTION  
Use only engine oil with the recommended grade and viscosity.  
Oil grade: API classification SJ or SH with the words “ENERGY  
CONSERVING II” (if you cannot obtain the oil with SJ  
or SH grade, you may use SG grade oil.) or the new  
API mark (Starbrust mark) displayed on the container.  
New API Certification Mark  
API Service label  
(Starbrust Mark)  
1
2
3
1 Indicates the oil quality by API designations  
2 Indicates the SAE oil viscosity grade  
3 Indicates that the oil has fuel saving capabilities  
In choosing an oil, you want the proper quality and viscosity, as well as  
one that will add to fuel economy. The following table lists the recom-  
mended viscosities and applicable temperatures.  
When adding oil, different brands may be used together as long as they  
are the same API classification and SAE viscosity as those recom-  
mended by SUBARU.  
Engine oil viscosity (thickness) affects fuel economy. Oils of lower vis-  
cosity provide better fuel economy. However, in hot weather, oil of higher  
viscosity is required to properly lubricate the engine.  
– CONTINUED –  
10-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SAE viscosity number and applicable  
temperature  
OM-H2756  
J Recommended grade and viscosity under severe driving condi-  
tions  
If the vehicle is used in desert areas, in areas with very high tempera-  
tures, or used for heavy-duty applications such as towing a trailer, use of  
oil with the following grade and viscosities is recommended.  
API classification: SJ or SH  
SAE viscosity No.: 30, 40, 10W-50, 20W-40, 20W-50  
Cooling system, hoses and connections  
Your vehicle employs an electric cooling fan which is thermostatically  
controlled to operate when the engine coolant reaches a specific tem-  
perature.  
If the radiator cooling fan does not operate even when the engine cool-  
ant temperature gauge exceeds the normal operating range, the circuit  
of the cooling fan may be defective. Check the fuse and replace it if nec-  
essary. If the fuse is not blown, have the cooling system checked by your  
SUBARU dealer.  
If frequent addition of coolant is necessary, there may be a leak in the  
engine cooling system. It is recommended that the cooling system and  
connections be checked for leaks, damage, or looseness.  
10-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and service  
Engine coolant  
J Checking the coolant level  
WARNING  
D Never attempt to remove the radiator cap until the engine has  
been shut off and has cooled down completely. Since the coolant  
is under pressure, you may suffer serious burns by a spray of  
boiling hot coolant when the cap is removed.  
D Never let engine coolant contact your eyes because engine  
coolant can be harmful to your eyes. If engine coolant gets in  
your eyes, immediately flush them thoroughly with clean water.  
For safety, when performing this work, wearing eye protection is  
advisable.  
Check the coolant level at each fuel stop.  
HG0114  
1. Check the coolant level on the outside of the reservoir while the en-  
gine is cool.  
2. If the level is close to or lower than the “LOW” level mark, add coolant  
up to the “FULL” level mark. If the reserve tank is empty, remove the ra-  
diator cap and refill as required.  
– CONTINUED –  
10-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CAUTION  
D The cooling system has been filled at the factory with a high  
quality, corrosion-inhibiting, year-around coolant which provides  
protection against freezing down to –33°F (–36°C).  
For adding, use genuine SUBARU coolant or an equivalent: a  
mixture of 50% soft water and 50% ethylene-glycol basis coolant.  
Use of improper coolants may result in corrosion in the cooling  
system. It is important to maintain protection against freezing  
and corrosion, even if freezing temperatures are not expected.  
Never mix different kinds of coolant.  
D Do not splash the engine coolant over painted parts. The alco-  
hol contained in the engine coolant may damage the paint sur-  
face.  
Rubber gaskets  
HG0115  
3. After refilling the reserve tank and the radiator, reinstall the caps and  
check that the rubber gasket inside the radiator cap is in the proper  
position.  
10-14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and service  
J Changing the coolant  
WARNING  
D Never let engine coolant contact your eyes because engine  
coolant can be harmful to your eyes. If engine coolant gets in  
your eyes, immediately flush them thoroughly with clean water.  
For safety, when performing this work, wearing eye protection is  
advisable.  
D Never attempt to remove the radiator cap until the engine has  
been shut off and has cooled down completely. Since the coolant  
is under pressure, you may suffer serious burns by a spray of  
boiling hot coolant when the cap is removed.  
CAUTION  
D The cooling system has been filled at the factory with a high-  
quality, corrosion-inhibiting, year-around coolant which provides  
protection against freezing down to –33°F (–36°C). Use the rec-  
ommended coolant only. Use of improper coolants may result in  
corrosion in the cooling system. It is important to maintain  
protection against freezing and corrosion, even if freezing tem-  
peratures are not expected. Never mix different kinds of coolant.  
D Do not splash the engine coolant over painted parts. The alco-  
hol contained in the engine coolant may damage the paint sur-  
face.  
Change the engine coolant in the following procedures according to the  
maintenance schedule in the warranty and maintenance booklet.  
1. Place a proper container under the drain plug and loosen the drain  
plug.  
– CONTINUED –  
10-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
HGA000BB  
2. Loosen the radiator cap to drain the coolant from the radiator. Then  
drain the coolant from the reserve tank. Tighten the drain plug securely.  
Filler neck  
“FULL”  
level mark  
“LOW”  
level mark  
Fill up to here  
OM-H0197  
HG0114  
3. Slowly pour the coolant and fill to the radiator filler neck and to the  
reserve tank’s “FULL” level mark. Do not pour the coolant too quickly, as  
this may lead to insufficient air bleeding and trapped air in the system.  
Coolant capacity: 6.2 US qt (5.8 liters, 5.2 Imp qt)  
10-16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and service  
Rubber gaskets  
HG0115  
4. Put the radiator cap back on and tighten firmly. At this time, make  
sure that the rubber gaskets in the radiator cap is correctly in place.  
5. Start and run the engine for more than five minutes at 2,000 to 3,000  
rpm.  
6. Stop the engine and wait until the coolant cools down (122 to 140°F  
[50 to 60 °C]). If there is any loss of coolant, add coolant to the radiator’s  
filler neck and to the reserve tank’s “FULL” level.  
7. Put the radiator cap and reservoir cap back on and tighten firmly.  
Air cleaner element  
WARNING  
Do not operate the engine with the air cleaner element removed.  
The air cleaner element not only filters intake air but also stops  
flames if the engine backfires. If the air cleaner element is not  
installed when the engine backfires, you could be burned.  
The air cleaner element functions as a filter screen. When the element is  
perforated or removed, engine wear will be excessive and engine life  
shortened.  
The air cleaner element is a viscous type. It is unnecessary to clean or  
wash the element.  
– CONTINUED –  
10-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
J Replacing the air cleaner element  
Replace the air cleaner element according to the maintenance schedule  
in the warranty and maintenance booklet. Under extremely dusty condi-  
tions, replace it more frequently. It is recommended that you always use  
genuine SUBARU parts.  
HBA000BA  
HBA001BB  
1. Unsnap the two clamps holding the air cleaner case cover.  
2. Open the air cleaner case cover and remove the air cleaner element.  
3. Clean the inside of the air cleaner cover and case with a damp cloth  
and install a new air cleaner element.  
4. To install the air cleaner case cover, insert three projections on the air  
cleaner case into the slits on the cleaner case cover and then snap the  
two clamps on the air cleaner case cover.  
B For 2.2 Liter vehicles (California specification)  
HBA002BB  
HBA003BB  
10-18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and service  
1. Remove the bolt securing the rear air cleaner element case.  
2. Unsnap the three clamps holding the rear air cleaner element  
case.  
3. Separate the air cleaner element cases and remove the air cleaner  
element.  
4. Clean the inside of the air cleaner element case with a damp cloth  
and install a new air cleaner element.  
5. Insert the four projections on the rear air cleaner element case into  
the slits on the front air cleaner element case and snap the three  
clamps on the rear air cleaner element case and then tighten the bolt.  
Spark plugs  
J Replacing the spark plugs  
CAUTION  
D When disconnecting the spark plug cables, always grasp the  
spark plug cap, not the cables.  
D Make sure the cables are replaced in the correct order.  
HBA004BA  
Replace the spark plugs according to the maintenance schedule in the  
warranty and maintenance booklet.  
– CONTINUED –  
10-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
J Recommended spark plugs  
NGK  
CHAMPION  
RC10YC4  
BKR5E-11  
Drive belts  
J Inspection  
The alternator, power steering pump, and air conditioner compressor de-  
pend on drive belts. Satisfactory performance requires that belt tension  
be correct.  
in. (mm)  
Deflection  
New belt  
Used belt  
0.28 — 0.35  
(7.0 — 9.0)  
0.35 — 0.43  
(9.0 — 11.0)  
1
2
0.30 — 0.33  
(7.5 — 8.5)  
0.35 — 0.40  
(9.0 — 10.0)  
To check belt tension, place a straightedge (ruler) across two adjacent  
pulleys and apply a force of 98 N (22 lb, 10 kg) midway between the  
pulleys by using a spring scale. Belt deflection should be the amount  
10-20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and service  
specified. If a belt is loose, cracked, or worn, contact your SUBARU  
dealer.  
Manual transmission oil  
J Checking the oil level  
WARNING  
Never let transmission oil contact your eyes because transmis-  
sion oil can be harmful to your eyes. If transmission oil gets in  
your eyes, immediately flush them thoroughly with clean water.  
For safety, when performing this work, wearing eye protection is  
advisable.  
Check the oil level monthly.  
1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and stop the engine.  
Upper level  
Lower level  
HGA006BB  
OM-H0210  
2. Pull out the dipstick, wipe it clean, and insert it again.  
3. Pull out the dipstick again and check the oil level on it. If it is below  
the lower level, add oil through the dipstick hole to bring the level up to  
the upper level.  
J Recommended grade and viscosity  
Each oil manufacturer has its own base oils and additives. Never use dif-  
ferent brands together.  
– CONTINUED –  
10-21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Oil grade: API classification GL-5  
SAE viscosity No. and Applicable Temperature  
OM-H0205  
Automatic transmission fluid  
WARNING  
Never let automatic transmission fluid contact your eyes because  
automatic transmission fluid can be harmful to your eyes. If auto-  
matic transmission fluid gets in your eyes, immediately flush  
them thoroughly with clean water. For safety, when performing  
this work, wearing eye protection is advisable.  
The automatic transmission fluid expands largely as its temperature  
rises; the fluid level differs according to fluid temperature. Therefore,  
there are two different scales for checking the level of hot fluid and cold  
fluid on the dipstick.  
Though the fluid level can be checked without warming up the fluid on  
the “COLD” side, we recommend checking the fluid level when the fluid  
is operating temperature.  
10-22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and service  
J Checking the fluid level when the fluid is hot  
Check the fluid level monthly.  
1. Drive the vehicle several miles to raise the temperature of the trans-  
mission fluid up to normal operating temperature; 140 to 176°F (60 to 80  
°C) is normal.  
2. Park the vehicle on a level surface and set the parking brake.  
3. First shift the selector lever in each position. Then shift it in the “P”  
position, and run the engine at idling speed.  
Upper  
level  
Lower  
level  
Upper  
level  
Lower  
level  
HGA007BB  
OM-H0207  
4. Pull out the dipstick and check the fluid level on the gauge. If it is be-  
low the lower level on the “HOT” range, add the recommended automat-  
ic transmission fluid up to the upper level.  
J Checking the fluid level when the fluid is cold  
When the fluid level has to be checked without time to warm up the auto-  
matic transmission, check to see that the fluid level is between the lower  
level and upper level on the “COLD” range. If it is below that range, add  
fluid up to the upper level. Be careful not to overfill.  
J Recommended fluid  
“Dexron II” or “Dexron III” Type Automatic Transmission Fluid  
10-23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Front differential gear oil (Automatic transmission)  
J Checking the oil level  
WARNING  
Never let gear oil contact your eyes because gear oil can be  
harmful to your eyes. If gear oil gets in your eyes, immediately  
flush them thoroughly with clean water. For safety, when perform-  
ing this work, wearing eye protection is advisable.  
Check the differential oil level monthly.  
Upper level  
Lower level  
HGA008BB  
OM-H0210  
1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and stop the engine.  
2. Pull out the dipstick, wipe it clean, and insert it again.  
3. Pull out the dipstick again and check the oil level on it. If it is below  
the lower level, add oil to bring the level up to the upper level.  
J Recommended grade and viscosity  
Each oil manufacturer has its own base oils and additives. Never use dif-  
ferent brands together.  
Oil grade: API classification GL-5  
10-24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and service  
SAE viscosity No. and Applicable Temperature  
OM-H0212  
Rear differential gear oil  
J Checking the oil level  
WARNING  
Never let gear oil contact your eyes because gear oil can be  
harmful to your eyes. If gear oil gets in your eyes, immediately  
flush them thoroughly with clean water. For safety, when perform-  
ing this work, wearing eye protection is advisable.  
CAUTION  
If the vehicle requires frequent refilling, there may be an oil leak.  
If you suspect a problem, have the vehicle checked at your  
SUBARU dealer.  
– CONTINUED –  
10-25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Filler plug  
Oil level  
Filler hole  
Drain hole  
Drain plug  
OM-H0213  
OM-H0214  
Filler hole  
Oil level  
Filler hole  
Drain hole  
Drain hole  
HB0077  
HB0078  
Remove the plug from the filler hole and check the oil level. The oil level  
should be kept even with the bottom of the filler hole. If the oil level is  
below the bottom edge of the hole, add oil through the filler hole to raise  
the level.  
J Recommended grade and viscosity  
Each oil manufacturer has its own base oils and additives. Never use dif-  
ferent brands together.  
Oil grade: API classification GL-5  
10-26  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and service  
SAE viscosity No. and Applicable Temperature  
OM-H0205  
Power steering fluid  
WARNING  
Never let power steering fluid contact your eyes because power  
steering fluid can be harmful to your eyes. If power steering fluid  
gets in your eyes, immediately flush them thoroughly with clean  
water. For safety, when performing this work, wearing eye protec-  
tion is advisable.  
The power steering fluid expands largely as its temperature rises; the  
fluid level differs according to fluid temperature. Therefore, the dipstick  
has two different checking ranges for hot and cold fluids on it.  
J Checking the fluid level when the fluid is hot  
WARNING  
Be careful not to burn yourself because the fluid may be hot.  
– CONTINUED –  
10-27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CAUTION  
D When power steering fluid is being added, use only clean fluid,  
and be careful not to allow any dirt into the tank. And never use  
different brands together.  
D Avoid spilling fluid when adding it in the tank.  
Check the power steering fluid level monthly.  
1. Drive the vehicle several miles to raise the temperature of the power  
steering fluid up to normal operating temperature, about 140°F (60°C).  
2. Park the vehicle on a level surface, and stop the engine.  
3. Turn the reservoir cap counterclockwise to remove the fluid level dip-  
stick, wipe the dipstick clean, and reinsert it.  
cified  
Spe
e  
ran
HG0120  
OM-H2531  
4. Remove the dipstick again and check the fluid level on it. If it is below  
the lower level of the “HOT” range, add the recommended steering fluid  
up to the specified range of the dipstick.  
If the fluid level is extreme low, it may indicate possible leakage. Consult  
your SUBARU dealer for inspection.  
J Checking the fluid level when the fluid is cold  
When the fluid level has to be checked without warming up the power  
steering system (approximately 70°F [21°C]), read the fluid level on the  
“COLD” range.  
10-28  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and service  
J Recommended fluid  
“Dexron II, Dexron II E or Dexron III” Type Automatic Transmission  
Fluid  
Brake fluid  
J Checking the fluid level  
WARNING  
D Never let brake fluid contanct your eyes because brake fluid  
can be harmful to your eyes. If brake fluid gets in your eyes, im-  
mediately flush them thoroughly with clean water. For safety,  
when performing this work, wearing eye protection is advisable.  
D Brake fluid absorbs moisture from the air. Any absorbed mois-  
ture can cause a dangerous loss of braking performance.  
D If the vehicle requires frequent refilling, there may be a leak. If  
you suspect a problem, have the vehicle checked at your  
SUBARU dealer.  
CAUTION  
D Never use different brands of brake fluid together.  
D When adding brake fluid, be careful not to allow any dirt into  
the reservoir.  
D Never splash the brake fluid over painted surfaces or rubber  
parts. Alcohol contained in the brake fluid may damage them.  
Check the fluid level monthly.  
– CONTINUED –  
10-29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
HGA009BB  
Check the fluid level on the outside of the reservoir. If the level is below  
“MIN”, add the recommended brake fluid to “MAX”.  
Use only brake fluid from a sealed container.  
J Recommended brake fluid  
FMVSS No. 116, fresh DOT 3 or 4 brake fluid  
Clutch fluid (2.5 liter MT models)  
WARNING  
Never let clutch fluid contanct your eyes because clutch fluid can  
be harmful to your eyes. If clutch fluid gets in your eyes, immedi-  
ately flush them thoroughly with clean water. For safety, when  
performing this work, wearing eye protection is advisable.  
CAUTION  
D Clutch fluid absorbs moisture from the air. Any absorbed  
moisture can cause improper clutch operation.  
D If the vehicle requires frequent refilling, there may be a leak. If  
you suspect a problem, have the vehicle checked at your  
SUBARU dealer.  
10-30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and service  
D Never use different brands of clutch fluid together.  
D When clutch fluid is added, be careful not to allow any dirt into  
the tank.  
Check the fluid level on the outside of the reservoir. If the level is below  
“MIN” level mark, add the recommended clutch fluid to “MAX” level mark.  
Use only clutch fluid from a sealed container.  
“MAX”  
level mark  
“MIN” level mark  
HG0355  
J Recommended clutch fluid  
FMVSS No. 116, fresh DOT 3 or 4 brake fluid  
Brake booster  
J Checking brake booster operation  
If the brake booster does not operate as described below, have it  
checked by your SUBARU dealer.  
1. With the engine off, depress the brake pedal several times, applying  
the same pedal force each time. The distance the pedal travels should  
not vary.  
2. With the brake pedal depressed, start the engine. The pedal should  
move slightly down to the floor.  
3. With the brake pedal depressed, stop the engine and keep the pedal  
pressed for 30 seconds. The pedal height should not change.  
– CONTINUED –  
10-31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4. Start the engine again and run for about one minute then turn it off.  
Depress the brake pedal several times to check the brake booster.  
Brake booster operates properly if the pedal stroke decreases with each  
depression.  
Battery  
WARNING  
D Before beginning work on or near any battery, be sure to extin-  
guish all cigarettes, matches, and lighters. Never expose a bat-  
tery to an open flame or electric sparks. Batteries give off a gas  
which is highly flammable and explosive.  
D For safety, in case an explosion does occur, wear eye protec-  
tion or shield your eyes when working near any battery. Never  
lean over a battery.  
D Do not let battery fluid contact eyes, skin, fabrics, or paint be-  
cause battery fluid is a corrosive acid. If battery fluid gets on your  
skin or in your eyes, immediately flush the area with water thor-  
oughly. Seek medical help immediately if acid has entered the  
eyes.  
D To lessen the risk of sparks, remove rings, metal watchbands,  
and other metal jewelry. Never allow metal tools to contact the  
positive battery terminal and anything connected to it WHILE you  
are at the same time in contact with any other metallic portion of  
the vehicle because a short circuit will result.  
D Keep everyone including children away from the battery.  
D Charge the battery in a well-ventilated area.  
CAUTION  
Never use more than 10 amperes when charging the battery be-  
cause it will shorten battery life.  
10-32  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and service  
J Checking the fluid level  
Cap  
Upper level  
Lower level  
OM-H1048  
It is unnecessary to periodically check the battery fluid level or periodi-  
cally refill with distilled water.  
However, if the battery fluid level is below the lower level, remove the  
cap. Fill to the upper level with distilled water.  
Windshield washer fluid  
CAUTION  
Never use engine coolant as washer fluid because it could cause  
paint damage.  
Check the level of the washer fluid at each fuel stop. If the level is low, fill  
the fluid up to the neck of the reservoir.  
Use windshield washer fluid. If windshield washer fluid is unavailable use  
clean water.  
In areas where water freezes in winter, use an anti-freeze type windshield  
washer fluid. SUBARU Windshield Washer Fluid contains 58.5% methyl  
alcohol and 41.5% surfactant, by volume. Its freezing temperature varies  
according to how much it is diluted, as indicated below.  
– CONTINUED –  
10-33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Washer Fluid Concentration  
Freezing Temperature  
30%  
50%  
10.4°F(–12°C)  
–4 °F(–20°C)  
–49°F(–45°C)  
100%  
HG0122  
Replacement of windshield wiper blades  
Grease, wax, insects, or other material on the windshield or the wiper  
blade results in jerky wiper operation and streaking on the glass. If you  
cannot remove those streaks after operating the windshield washer or if  
the wiper operation is jerky, clean the outer surface of the windshield (or  
rear window) and the wiper blades using a sponge or soft cloth with a  
neutral detergent or mild-abrasive cleaner. After cleaning, rinse the wind-  
shield and wiper blades with clean water. The windshield is clean if  
beads do not form when you rinse the windshield with water.  
CAUTION  
Do not clean the wiper blades with gasoline or a solvent, such as  
paint thinner or benzene. This will cause deterioration of the  
wiper blades.  
10-34  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and service  
If you cannot eliminate the streaking ever after following this method,  
replace the wiper blades using the following procedures:  
1. Raise the wiper arm off the windshield.  
2. Remove the wiper blade assembly by holding its pivot area and push-  
ing it in the direction shown by the arrow while depressing the wiper  
blade stopper.  
Stopper  
HS0190  
3. Grasp the locked end of the blade rubber assembly and pull it firmly  
until the stoppers on the rubber are free of the metal support.  
Metal support  
HS0191  
4. If the new blade rubber is not provided with two metal spines, remove  
the metal spines from the old blade rubber and install them in the new  
blade rubber.  
– CONTINUED –  
10-35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Metal spines  
HS0192  
5. Align the claws of the metal support with the grooves in the rubber  
and slide the blade rubber assembly into the metal support until it locks.  
Be sure to position the claws at the end of the metal support between the  
stoppers on the rubber as shown. If the rubber is not retained properly,  
the wiper blade may scratch the windshield.  
Stopper  
HS0193  
HS0194  
6. Install the wiper blade assembly to the wiper arm. Make sure that it  
locks in place.  
7. Lower the wiper arm.  
10-36  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and service  
Brake pedal  
Check the brake pedal free play and reserve distance according to the  
maintenance schedule in the warranty and maintenance booklet.  
J Checking the brake pedal free play  
0.04 — 0.12 in  
(1.0 — 3.0 mm)  
OM-H0224  
Stop the engine and firmly depress the brake pedal several times. Light-  
ly press the brake pedal down by finger to check the free play with a  
force of less than 10 N (2 lb., 1 kg).  
If the free play is not within proper specification, contact your SUBARU  
dealer.  
J Checking the brake pedal reserve distance  
More than  
2.56 in  
(65 mm)  
OM-H0225  
– CONTINUED –  
10-37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Depress the pedal with a force of approximately 294 N (66 lb., 30 kg)  
and measure the distance between the upper surface of the pedal pad  
and the floor.  
When the measurement is smaller than the specification, or when the  
pedal does not operate smoothly, contact with your SUBARU dealer.  
Clutch pedal (Manual transmission)  
Check the clutch pedal free play and reserve distance according to the  
maintenance schedule in the warranty and maintenance booklet.  
J Checking the clutch function  
Check the clutch engagement and disengagement.  
1. With the engine idling, check that there are no abnormal noises when  
the clutch pedal is depressed, and that shifting into 1st or reverse feels  
smooth.  
2. Start the vehicle by releasing the pedal slowly to check that the en-  
gine and transmission smoothly couple without any sign of slippage.  
J Checking the clutch pedal free play  
2.5L MT models  
0.11 — 5.59 in  
(3.0 — 15.0 mm)  
2.2L MT models  
0.40 — 0.79 in  
(10.0 — 20.0 mm)  
OM-H0224  
Lightly press the clutch pedal down with your finger until you feel resis-  
tance, and check the free play.  
If the free play is not within proper specification, contact your SUBARU  
dealer.  
10-38  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and service  
Replacement of brake pad and lining  
J Audible brake pad wear indicator  
OM-H0163  
The front disc brake has an audible wear indicator on the brake pads.  
For RS models, the right side rear disc brake also has a audible wear  
indicator. If the brake pads wear close to their service limit, the wear indi-  
cator makes a very audible scraping noise when the brake pedal is ap-  
plied.  
If you hear this scraping noise each time you apply the brake pedal,  
have the brake pads serviced by your SUBARU dealer as soon as pos-  
sible.  
CAUTION  
If you continue to drive despite the scraping noise from the audi-  
ble brake pad wear indicator, it will result in the need for costly  
brake rotor repair or replacement.  
J Breaking-in of new brake pads and linings  
When replacing the brake pad or lining, use only genuine SUBARU  
parts. After replacement, the new parts must be broken in as follows:  
B Brake pad and lining  
While maintaining a speed of 30 to 40 mph (50 to 65 km/h), step on  
the brake pedal lightly. Repeat this five or more times.  
– CONTINUED –  
10-39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
B Parking brake lining  
WARNING  
A safe location and situation should be selected for break-in driv-  
ing.  
CAUTION  
Pulling the parking brake lever too forcefully may cause the rear  
wheels to lock. To avoid this, be certain to pull the lever up slowly  
and gently.  
1. Drive the vehicle at a speed of about 22 mph (35 km/h).  
2. With the parking brake release button pushed in, pull the parking  
brake lever SLOWLY and GENTLY. (Pulling with a force of approxi-  
mately 147 N [15 Kg, 33 lb].)  
3. Drive the vehicle for about 220 yards (200 meters) in this condition.  
4. Wait 5 to 10 minutes for the parking brake to cool down. Repeat  
this procedure again.  
5. Check the parking brake stroke. If the parking brake stroke is out  
of the specified range, adjust it by turning the adjusting nut located  
on the parking brake lever.  
Parking brake stroke: 7 — 8 notches / 196 N (20 kg, 44 lb.)  
Parking brake stroke  
Check the parking brake stroke according to the maintenance schedule  
in the warranty and maintenance booklet. When the parking brake is  
properly adjusted, braking power is fully applied by pulling the lever up  
seven to eight notches gently but firmly (about 196 N, 44 lb., 20 kg). If  
the parking brake lever stroke is not within the specified range, have the  
brake system checked and adjusted at your SUBARU dealer.  
10-40  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and service  
7 to 8 notches  
HG0360  
Tires and wheels  
J Inspection and rotation  
WARNING  
D When replacing a tire, make sure you use only the same size,  
construction brand, and load range as the original tires listed on  
the tire placard. Using other sizes or construction may result in  
severe mechanical damage to the drive train of your vehicle and  
may affect ride, handling, braking, speedometer/odometer cal-  
ibration, and clearance between the body and tires. It also may be  
dangerous and lead to loss of vehicle control.  
D Do not use a combination of radial, belted bias or bias tires  
since it may cause dangerous handling characteristics and lead  
to an accident.  
D Do not let air out of warm tires to adjust pressure. Doing so  
will result in low tire pressure.  
The tires should be checked frequently for proper tire pressure, wear,  
and cuts.  
B Checking the tire pressure  
For the best balance between fuel economy, tire life, ride comfort, and  
handling, tire pressure should be maintained in accordance with  
– CONTINUED –  
10-41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
specifications. Check the tire pressure when the tires are cold. Cold  
means that the vehicle has been parked for three hours or has been  
driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km).  
HG0278  
The recommended tire pressure and sizes are provided on the tire  
placard, which is located under the door latch on the driver’s side.  
Tire wear will vary with each wheel. To increase the life of tires and keep  
wear uniform, it is best to rotate them every 7,500 miles (12,000 km).  
When rotating tires, replace any unevenly worn or damaged tire. After  
rotating the tires, adjust tire pressure and be sure to check wheel nut  
tightness.  
New tread  
Worn tread  
Tread wear indicator  
OM-H0230  
OM-H0231  
A tire should be replaced when the tread wear indicator appears as a  
solid band across the tread. The indicators appear when the remaining  
tread has been worn to 0.063 in (1.6 mm) or less.  
10-42  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and service  
J Wheel covers (Locking type wheel covers)  
B Removing the wheel cover  
CAUTION  
If it becomes necessary to remove the wheel cover, NEVER use a  
screwdriver or other prying tool. Doing so will severely damage  
or destroy the wheel cover.  
HG0105  
Grasp the wheel cover with both hands by the spokes and twist  
sharply in a counterclockwise direction until you feel the detent  
release. Now the wheel cover is free from the retention ring.  
B Installing the wheel cover  
1. Install the wheel cover on the retention ring, aligning the valve stem  
with the valve stem area and fitting the lock pins on the wheel cover  
with the lock springs in the retention ring.  
– CONTINUED –  
10-43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Lock pin  
HG0124  
2. Grasp the wheel cover with both hands by the spokes and twist  
sharply in a clockwise direction until you feel the detent locking. After  
twisting the wheel cover, make sure the wheel cover is locked  
securely by lightly turning the wheel cover right and left.  
HG0126  
NOTE  
When any of the wheels is removed and replaced for tire rotation or to  
change a flat tire, always check the tightness of the wheel nuts after driv-  
ing approximately 600 miles (1,000 km). If any nut is loose, tighten it to  
the specified torque.  
10-44  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and service  
J Wheel covers (Regular type wheel covers)  
B Removing the wheel cover  
HGA012BA  
Insert the wheel cover remover into the notch provided, and pry the  
wheel cover off.  
B Installing the wheel cover  
HGA013BA  
Align the valve with the valve hole in the cover, then fit the cover on  
the wheel by tapping your hand evenly around the circumference of  
the cover.  
NOTE  
When any of the wheels is removed and replaced for tire rotation or to  
change a flat tire, always check the tightness of the wheel nuts after driv-  
ing approximately 600 miles (1,000 km). If any nut is loose, tighten it to  
the specified torque.  
10-45  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Aluminum wheels (if equipped)  
Aluminum wheels can be scratched and damaged easily. Handle them  
carefully to maintain their appearance, performance, and safety.  
D When any of the wheels is removed and replaced for tire rotation or to  
change a flat, always check the tightness of the wheel nuts after driving  
approximately 600 miles (1,000 km). If any nut is loose, tighten it to the  
specified torque.  
D Never apply oil to the threaded parts, wheel nuts, or tapered surface  
of the wheel.  
D Never let the wheel rub against sharp protrusions or curbs.  
D Be sure to fit tire chains on uniformly and completely around the tire,  
otherwise the chains may scratch the wheel.  
D When wheel nuts, balance weights, or the center cap are replaced,  
be sure to replace them with genuine SUBARU parts designed for alumi-  
num wheels.  
Fuses  
HS0202  
HG0127  
The fuses are designed to melt during an overload to prevent damage to  
the wiring harness and electrical equipment. The fuses are located in  
two fuse boxes.  
If any lights, accessories or other electrical controls do not operate, in-  
spect the corresponding fuse. If a fuse has blown, replace it.  
10-46  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and service  
Good  
Blown  
HS0204  
J Replacing a fuse  
CAUTION  
Never replace a fuse with one having a higher rating or with mate-  
rial other than a fuse because serious damage or a fire could re-  
sult.  
B Fuse box (behind the coin tray)  
1. Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK” position and turn off all elec-  
trical accessories.  
HS0202  
2. Open the coin tray and pull it horizontally to remove it.  
3. Determine which fuse may be blown. The back side of the coin  
tray and the Fuse and Circuits section in chapter 11 in this manual  
– CONTINUED –  
10-47  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
show the circuit for each fuse.  
Fuse puller  
Fuse puller  
Spare fuse  
HS0207  
HS0208  
4. Pull out the fuse with the fuse puller. The fuse puller is stored in the  
main fuse box cover in the engine compartment.  
5. Inspect the fuse. If it has blown, replace it with a spare fuse of the  
same rating. The spare fuses are stored in the main fuse box cover in  
the engine compartment.  
6. If the same fuse blows again, this indicates that its system has a  
problem. Contact your SUBARU dealer for repairs.  
B Main fuse box (in the engine compartment)  
1. Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK” position and turn off all elec-  
trical accessories.  
2. Open the engine hood.  
3. Remove the main fuse box cover.  
4. Determine which fuse may be blown. The fuse box cover and Fuse  
and Circuits section in chapter 11 in this manual show the circuit for  
each fuse.  
10-48  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and service  
Fuse puller  
Fuse puller  
Spare fuse  
HS0207  
HS0208  
5. Pull out the fuse with the fuse puller provided in the main fuse box  
cover.  
6. Inspect the fuse. If it has blown, replace it with a spare fuse of the  
same rating. The spare fuses are stored in the main fuse box cover in  
the engine compartment.  
7. If the same fuse blows again, this indicates that its system has a  
problem. Contact your SUBARU dealer for repairs.  
Main fuse and fusible link  
27  
The main fuses and fusible link are designed to melt during an overload  
to prevent damage to the wiring harness and electrical equipment.  
Check the main fuses and fusible link if any electrical component fails to  
– CONTINUED –  
10-49  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
operate (except the starter motor) and other fuses are good. A melted  
main fuse or fusible link must be replaced. Use only replacements with  
the same specified rating as the melted main fuse or fusible link. If a  
main fuse or fusible link blows after it is replaced, have the electrical sys-  
tem checked by your nearest SUBARU dealer.  
Installation of accessories  
Always consult your SUBARU dealer before installing fog lights or any  
other electrical equipment in your vehicle. Such accessories may cause  
the electronic system to malfunction if they are incorrectly installed or if  
they are not suited for the vehicle.  
10-50  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and service  
Replacing bulbs  
J Headlight  
CAUTION  
Halogen headlight bulbs become very hot while in use. If you  
touch the bulb surface with bare hands or greasy gloves, finger  
prints or grease on the bulb surface develop into hot spots, caus-  
ing the bulb to break. If there are finger prints or grease on the  
bulb surface, wipe them away with a soft cloth moistened with al-  
cohol.  
Rubber cover  
Retainer spring  
Electrical  
connector  
3  
1. Disconnect the electrical connector, then remove the rubber cover.  
2. Remove the retainer spring.  
3. Replace the bulb, then set the retainer spring securely.  
4. Install the rubber cover with the top mark facing up, then reconnect  
the electrical connector.  
– CONTINUED –  
10-51  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
J Fog light (if equipped)  
CAUTION  
Halogen light bulbs become very hot while in use. If you touch  
the bulb surface with bare hands or greasy gloves, finger prints  
or grease on the bulb surface develop into hot spots, causing the  
bulb to break. If there are finger prints or grease on the bulb sur-  
face, wipe them away with a soft cloth moistened with alcohol.  
B Type A  
HGA001BB  
HGA002BA  
1. Remove the front fog light assembly by removing the three bolts.  
2. Disconnect the connector.  
3. Remove the front fog light case cap by turning it counterclockwise.  
Spring  
Connector  
OM-H0412  
10-52  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and service  
4. Disconnect the connector behind the case cap.  
5. Release the retainer spring.  
6. Replace the bulb with a new one. Then reconnect the connectors  
and reinstall the removed parts in the reverse order of removal.  
B Type B  
HG0325  
HG0326  
1. Remove the front fog light cover.  
2. Remove the front fog light assembly by removing the two bolts.  
3. Disconnect the connector.  
4. Remove the front fog light case cap by turning it counterclockwise.  
Connector  
Spring  
HG0327  
5. Disconnect the connector behind the case cap.  
6. Release the retainer spring.  
7. Replace the bulb with a new one. Then reconnect the connectors  
and reinstall the removed parts in the reverse order of removal.  
– CONTINUED –  
10-53  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
J Parking light  
OM-H0244  
1. Remove the parking light assembly mounting screw located at the top  
of the headlight assembly using the phillips screwdriver.  
2. Move the parking light assembly forward until it pops out from the  
fender.  
3. Remove the bulb holder from the parking light assembly by turning it  
counterclockwise.  
4. Pull the bulb out of the socket. Install a new bulb.  
5. Set the bulb holder into the parking light assembly and turn it clock-  
wise until it locks.  
6. Set the parking light assembly into the fender. Tighten the mounting  
screw.  
10-54  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and service  
J Front turn signal light  
B Type A  
HGA011BB  
1. Remove the bolt securing the front turn signal light assembly.  
2. Remove the front turn signal light assembly from the front bumper  
and remove the bulb socket by turning it counterclockwise.  
3. Remove the bulb from the socket by pushing it in and turning  
clockwise, then install a new bulb.  
4. Install the removed parts in the reverse order of removal.  
B Type B  
HG0194  
1. Remove the front turn signal light assembly mounting screws using  
the phillips screwdriver.  
2. Remove the lens from the front turn signal light assembly.  
– CONTINUED –  
10-55  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3. Remove the bulb from the socket by pushing it in and turning  
counterclockwise. Install a new bulb.  
4. Reinstall the lens to the front turn signal light assembly and tighten  
the mounting screws.  
J Side turn signal light  
46  
1. Pull the left side of the turn signal light assembly while moving it for-  
ward in relation to the vehicle.  
2. Remove the bulb holder from the side turn signal light assembly by  
turning it counterclockwise.  
3. Pull the bulb out of the socket. Install a new bulb.  
4. Set the bulb holder into the side turn signal light assembly and turn it  
clockwise until it locks.  
5. Reinstall the side turn signal light assembly on the side of the front  
fender.  
10-56  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and service  
J Rear combination lights  
B Sedan and Coupe  
HG0241  
OM-H0446  
1. Remove the spare tire cover.  
2. Remove the clip from the rear trunk trim with a regular screw driver.  
3. Remove the nut securing the rear trunk trim.  
OM-H0447  
4. Open the rear portion of the side trunk trim panel.  
5. Remove the bulb holder from the rear combination light assembly  
by turning it counterclockwise.  
6. Remove the bulb from the socket by pushing it and turning coun-  
terclockwise. Install a new bulb.  
7. Set the bulb holder into the rear combination light assembly and  
turn it clockwise until it locks.  
8. Secure the rear trunk trim panel with the nut and the clips.  
– CONTINUED –  
10-57  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
B Wagon  
HG0195  
1. Unlatch the rear combination light cover by pulling the knob. Open  
the cover up.  
OM-H0449  
2. Remove the bulb holder from the rear combination light assembly  
by turning it counterclockwise.  
3. Remove the bulb from the socket by pushing it and turning coun-  
terclockwise. Install a new bulb.  
4. Set the bulb holder into the rear combination light assembly and  
turn it clockwise until it locks.  
5. Close the cover and latch the lock.  
10-58  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance and service  
J License plate light  
HG0198  
1. Remove the mounting screws using a phillips screwdriver.  
2. Remove the cover and lens.  
3. Pull the bulb out of the socket. Install a new bulb.  
4. Reinstall the lens and cover.  
5. Tighten the mounting screws.  
J Interior light, spot light  
OM-H0250  
OM-H0251  
1. Remove the lens by prying the edge of the lens with a regular screw-  
driver.  
2. Pull the bulb out of the socket. Install a new bulb.  
3. Reinstall the lens.  
10-59  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Specifications  
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2  
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Maximum load limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Electrical system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
11-2  
11-2  
11-2  
11-3  
11-3  
11-4  
Fuses and circuits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-5  
Fuse panel located under the dashboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Fuse panel located in the engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
11-5  
11-7  
Bulb chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8  
Vehicle identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-9  
11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Specifications  
These specifications are subject to change without notice.  
Dimensions  
Overall length  
Overall width  
Overall height  
172.2 in. (4,375 mm)  
67.1 in. (1,705 mm)  
1
56.3 in. (1,430 mm)*  
55.1 in. (1,410 mm)  
1
Ground clearance  
Front tread  
6.5 in. (165 mm)*  
5.7 in. (145 mm)  
57.5 in. (1,460 mm),  
57.9 in. (1,470 mm)*  
57.1 in. (1,450 mm),  
57.5 in. (1,460 mm)*  
99.2 in. (2,520 mm)  
2
2
Rear tread  
Wheelbase  
1
* : OUTBACK  
2
* : RS  
Maximum load limits  
Gross vehicle weight rating  
Gross axle weight rating  
See the certification label attached  
to the driver’s door jamb.  
Engine  
2500 cc  
Engine model  
Engine type  
EJ253  
Horizontally opposed,  
liquid cooled 4 cylinder,  
4 stroke gasoline engine  
149.9 cu in (2,457 cc)  
3.92 in. (99.5 mm)  
3.11 in. (79.0 mm)  
9.7 : 1  
Engine displacement  
Bore  
Stroke  
Compression ratio  
Firing order  
1 – 3 – 2 – 4  
11-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Specifications  
2200 cc  
Engine model  
Federal: EJ223  
California: EJ222  
Horizontally opposed,  
liquid cooled 4 cylinder,  
4 stroke gasoline engine  
135.0 cu in (2,212 cc)  
3.81 in. (96.9 mm)  
2.95 in. (75.0 mm)  
10.0 : 1  
Engine type  
Engine displacement  
Bore  
Stroke  
Compression ratio  
Firing order  
1 — 3 — 2 — 4  
Electrical system  
Battery  
Type  
MT: 55D23L, AT: 75D23L  
MT: 99 min., AT: 118 min.  
MT: 356 amp., AT: 520 amp.  
12V - 75A  
Reserve capacity  
Cold cranking ampere  
Alternator  
Spark plugs  
BKR5E-11 (NGK)  
RC10YC4 (CHAMPION)  
0.039 to 0.043 in. (1.0 to 1.1 mm)  
Spark plug gap  
Capacities  
2.5 Liter models  
Fuel tank  
15.9 US gal (60 liter, 13.2 Imp gal)  
4.2 US qt (4.0 liter, 3.5 Imp qt)  
3.7 US qt (3.5 liter, 3.1 Imp qt)  
Engine oil  
Transmission oil  
Automatic transmission fluid 9.8 US qt (9.3 liter, 8.2 Imp qt)  
AT differential gear oil 1.3 US qt (1.2 liter, 1.1 Imp qt)  
AWD rear differential gear oil 0.8 US qt (0.8 liter, 0.7 Imp qt)  
Power steering fluid  
Engine coolant  
0.7 US qt (0.7 liter, 0.6 Imp qt)  
6.2 US qt (5.8 liter, 5.2 Imp qt)  
2.2 Liter models  
Fuel tank  
15.9 US gal (60 liter, 13.2 Imp gal)  
4.2 US qt (4.0 liter, 3.5 Imp qt)  
3.7 US qt (3.5 liter, 3.1 Imp qt)  
Engine oil  
Transmission oil (AWD)  
– CONTINUED –  
11-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Automatic transmission fluid 8.9 US qt (8.4 liter, 7.4 Imp qt)  
AT differential gear oil 1.3 US qt (1.2 liter, 1.1 Imp qt)  
AWD rear differential gear oil 0.8 US qt (0.8 liter, 0.7 Imp qt)  
Power steering fluid  
Engine coolant  
0.7 US qt (0.7 liter, 0.6 Imp qt)  
6.2 US qt (5.8 liter, 5.2 Imp qt)  
Tires  
Type  
Size  
Steel belted radial, Tubeless  
P195/60R15  
Front and rear  
3
P205/60R15*  
2
P205/55R16*  
Spare  
Front  
Rear  
Spare  
T135/70D16  
32 psi (2.2 kg/cm , 220 kpa)  
29 psi (2.0 kg/cm , 200 kpa)  
2
Pressure  
2
2
60 psi (4.2 kg/cm , 420 kpa)  
2
Wheel size  
Front and rear  
16 x 7JJ*  
15 x 6JJ  
16 x 4T  
Spare  
Wheel alignment  
Toe  
Front  
0 " 0.12 in. (0 " 3 mm)  
Rear  
Front  
Rear  
0 " 0.12 in. (0 " 3 mm)  
–0°, –0°25’*  
2
Camber  
–0°50’ (FWD), –0°55’ (AWD)  
2
–0°10’ (AWD)’*  
2
* : RS  
3
* : OUTBACK  
11-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Specifications  
Fuses and circuits  
J Fuse panel located behind the coin tray  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
T
8
Y
9
U
Q
I
W
O
E
P
R
HS0224  
Fuse panel Fuse rating Circuit  
1
2
3
4
15A  
15A  
D Heater fan  
D Heater fan  
Empty  
20A  
D Front accessory power socket  
D Cigarette lighter  
D Remote controlled rear view mirrors  
5
10A  
D Tail light  
D Parking light  
6
7
8
9
15A  
15A  
20A  
15A  
D SRS AIRBAG  
D Fog light  
D ABS solenoid  
D Radio  
D Clock  
– CONTINUED –  
11-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Fuse panel Fuse rating Circuit  
10  
11  
Empty  
15A  
D Engine ignition system  
D SRS AIRBAG  
12  
13  
14  
10A  
Empty  
15A  
D Illumination brightness control  
D AT shift lock unit  
D ABS control  
D Cruise control  
15  
20A  
D Windshield wiper and washer  
D Rear window wiper and washer  
16  
17  
18  
20A  
15A  
15A  
D Brake light  
D Air conditioner  
D Backup light  
D Turn light  
D SRS AIRBAG warning light  
19  
20A  
D Rear accessory power socket  
D Seat heater  
11-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Specifications  
J Fuse panel located in the engine compartment  
FWD socket  
A
S
K
L
G
D
F
H
J
Z
X
Fusible link  
HS0225  
Fuse panel Fuse rating Circuit  
20  
21  
22  
23  
20A  
20A  
20A  
15A  
D Radiator cooling fan (Main)  
D Radiator cooling fan (Sub)  
D Rear window defogger  
D Hazard warning flasher  
D Horn  
24  
25  
26  
27  
28  
29  
30  
15A  
10A  
10A  
15A  
15A  
20A  
15A  
D Power door lock  
D Automatic transmission control unit  
D Alternator  
D Headlight (right side)  
D Headlight (left side)  
D Lighting switch  
D Clock  
D Interior light  
11-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Bulb chart  
Description  
Headlight  
Wattage  
Bulb No.  
HB2 (H4)  
1156  
194  
194  
12V-60/55W  
12V-27W  
12V-3.8W  
12V-3.8W  
Front turn signal  
Side marker/Parking  
Side turn signal  
Rear combination light  
Brake/tail and Marker  
Turn signal  
12V-27/8W  
12V-27W  
12V-27W  
12V-18W  
12V-13W  
12V-3.8W  
12V-8W  
1157  
1156  
1156  
921  
912  
194  
Back-up  
High mount stop light (Sedan)  
High mount stop light (Wagon)  
License plate light  
Interior light  
Fog light  
12V-55W  
H3  
11-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Specifications  
Vehicle identification  
HG0196  
1 Chassis number  
2 Emission control label  
3 Vacuum hose piping label  
4 Vehicle identification number plate  
5 Tire placard  
6 Certification plate  
7 Model number plate  
11-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Consumer information and  
Reporting safety defects  
Uniform tire quality grading standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2  
Treadwear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Traction A, B, C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Temperature A, B, C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
12-2  
12-2  
12-3  
Reporting safety defects (USA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-4  
12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
For U.S.A.  
The following information has been compiled according to Code of Fed-  
eral Regulations “Title 49, Part 575”.  
Uniform tire quality grading standards  
This information indicates the relative performance of passenger car tires  
in the area of treadwear, traction, and temperature resistance. This is to  
aid the consumer in making an informed choice in the purchase of tires.  
These grades are molded in the sidewall of the tire and can be inter-  
preted by referring to the following information:  
J Treadwear  
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of  
the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified govern-  
ment test course.  
For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half (1-1/2)  
times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100. The rela-  
tive performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their  
use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm due to varia-  
tions in driving habits, service practices and differences in road charac-  
teristics and climate.  
J Traction A, B, C  
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are A, B and C, and they  
represent a tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under  
controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt  
and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance.  
WARNING  
The traction grade assigned to a tire is based on braking (straigh-  
tahead) traction tests and does not include cornering (turning)  
traction.  
12-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Consumer information and Reporting safety defects  
J Temperature A, B, C  
The temperature grades are A (highest), B and C, representing the tire’s  
resistance to generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when  
tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test  
wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to  
degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to  
sudden tire failure. Grade C corresponds to a level of performance  
which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle  
Safety Standards No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of  
performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by  
law.  
WARNING  
The temperature grade for a tire is established for one that is  
properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, under  
inflation or excessive loading, either separately or in combina-  
tion, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.  
12-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Reporting safety defects (USA)  
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a  
crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately in-  
form the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA)  
in addition to notifying Subaru of America, Inc.  
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investiga-  
tion, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of ve-  
hicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However,  
NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between  
you, your dealer, or Subaru of America, Inc. To contact NHTSA,  
you may either call the Auto Safety Hotline toll-free at  
1-800-424-9393 (or 366-0123 in the Washington D.C. area) or  
write to: NHTSA, U.S. Department of Transportation, Washington,  
D.C. 20590. You can also obtain other information about motor  
vehicle safety from the Hotline.  
12-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

Sigma Network Card HDTV5 User Manual
Silvercrest Food Processor SAS 150 A1 User Manual
Singer Sewing Machine 1371A1 User Manual
Soleus Air Fan FTY 30 User Manual
Sony Digital Camera 3 287 969 15 1 User Manual
Sony DVD Player DVP K82P User Manual
Sony MP3 Player ZS D5 User Manual
Sony Speaker System SS NX1 User Manual
Sony TV Mount SU FW1 User Manual
Synology Server CS407 User Manual